JP6720477B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, comprising a guiding area in the game region, there is a game ball entering the sphere capable gaming machine on the guiding area (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-61177, A

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there is a problem that there is room for improvement for the stream of the game ball from the ball entrance to the inductive region.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem, ball entrance the game ball to the inductive area is an object to provide a gaming machine to better flow.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a first specific region which the player by the passage of the game ball game ball is a passable obtain a predetermined benefit, a game ball can pass and the predetermined specific region having a plurality of specific regions and a second specific area player benefit of less than the predetermined profit by the passage of the game ball there, can induce game balls to the predetermined specific region A guiding machine configured, and a gaming machine comprising movable means operable by a load from a game ball passing through the second specific area, and the first specific operation is performed by a predetermined operation of the movable means. A state in which a game ball easily passes through a region is formed, and when a plurality of game balls pass through the guide region within a predetermined period, a first game ball that has passed the guide region among the plurality of game balls the benefits the player obtained by the second game ball that has passed through the guiding area passes through the first specific region, passes through the second specific region game balls alone within the predetermined period after the It is greater than the profit that the player would get if he did.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, Ru with a substrate box.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to make the flow of the game ball that has entered the guide region flow down favorably.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 1, the board can be housed in the board box .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. It is a front view of the 1st flow-down apparatus. It is a side view of the 1st flow-down apparatus in the arrow VII direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the 1st flow-down apparatus in the arrow VIII direction view of FIG. It is a partial rear perspective view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution body. (A)-(c) is a front view of a distribution body. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down apparatus. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd flow-down apparatus. It is a front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus. FIG. 25 is a partial front view of the second downflow device in a range XXV of FIG. 24. 24A to 24C are partial front views of the second flow-down device in a range XXV of FIG. (A) is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the arrow XXVIIa direction view of FIG. 24, (b) is a partial cross section figure of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the XXVIIb-XXVIIb line of FIG. 27(a). .. It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the range XXVIII of FIG. (A) is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in arrow XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29(a). (A) is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the arrow XXXb direction view of FIG. 30(a). (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the range XXVIII of FIG. 32A is a partial front view of the second downflow device in a range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 32B is a partial top view of the second downflow device as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb of FIG. (A) is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the arrow XXXIIIb direction view of FIG. 33(a). (A) is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in arrow XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 34(a). It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the range XXVIII of FIG. (A) is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in arrow XXXVIb direction view of (a) of FIG. (A) is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in arrow XXXVIIb direction view of (a) of FIG. It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus. It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus. (A) is a front view of the 2nd flow-down device in a 2nd embodiment, and (b) and (c) are sectional views of the 2nd flow-down device in line XLb-XLb of Drawing 40 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of a 2nd flow-down apparatus. It is a front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus. It is a front view of the 1st flow-down apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a side view of the 1st flow-down apparatus in the arrow XLIV direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the 1st flow-down apparatus in the arrow XLV direction view of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of an introduction passage. 43A is a partial cross-sectional view of the first downflow device taken along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 43, and FIG. 47B is a partial cross-sectional view of the first downflow device taken along line XLVIIb-XLVIIb in FIG. 47A. .. FIG. 48 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first downflow device taken along line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. 47(b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the root distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the root distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the root distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the root distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. FIG. 25 is a partial front view of the second downflow device in the fifth embodiment in a range corresponding to the range XXV in FIG. 24. 24A to 24C are partial front views of the second downflow device in a range corresponding to the range XXV in FIG. It is a front view of the 2nd flow-down device in a 6th embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59(a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LX-LX line of FIG. 59 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LXI-LXI line of FIG. 59 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LXIIb-LXIIb line of FIG. 62(a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LXIII-LXIII line of FIG. 62 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64(a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LXV-LXV line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd downflow apparatus in the LXVI-LXVI line of FIG. 64 (a). 67 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along the line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 67. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 67. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along the line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 67. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 67. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along the line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 67. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 67. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd flow-down device in a 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a rolling bed apparatus. (A) is a front view of the second flow-down device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first annular member taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a), and (c) is FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of a). (A) And (b) is a sectional view of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of Drawing 85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). 85A and FIG. 85B are cross-sectional views of the first annular member taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85A. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line of FIG. 85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85, (c) is a 2nd annular member of the arrow XCIc direction view of FIG. 91 (a). It is a partial inside view. It is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. 85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line of FIG. 85 (a). (A) And (b) is a sectional view of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of Drawing 85 (a). It is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the arrow XCII direction view of FIG. 85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line of FIG. 85 (a). (A) And (b) is a sectional view of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of Drawing 85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line of FIG. 85 (a). (A) And (b) is a sectional view of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of Drawing 85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line of FIG. 85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in the CIa-CIa line of FIG.85(b). It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in a 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control unit in the first control example, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the 1st hit random number table in a 1st control example, (b) is the 1st random number counter in a 1st control example, and the small hit determination in a 1st special symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence with a value typically, (c) showed typically the correspondence with the 1st random number counter in a 1st control example, and the small hitting judgment value in a 2nd special symbol. It is a schematic diagram and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd hit random number counter and the hit in a normal symbol in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp controller in the first control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp controller in the first control example. It is a block diagram shown. It is a game flow diagram which shows the flow of the game by the pachinko machine of this embodiment as an example. It is a time chart explaining the flow from the winning of the left start winning opening or the right starting winning opening to the occurrence of the jackpot game in this control example. It is the time chart which explains the flow from the winning to the medium starting winning a prize to the occurrence of the big hit game in this control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which is executed in the special design fluctuation start processing, the small hitting start setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the wing entrance passage process performed in the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot effect device operation start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot time equipment device opening process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart showing the contents of the abnormal processing performed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed in the main process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit termination process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp edit process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows hit related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 26, 27, 28, 63, etc. is detachably attached from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) in front of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device (not shown) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. ..

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 in front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thus the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 is placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and two rails. A general winning opening 63, a relatively large movable ball winning combination device 190, a left start winning hole 26 arranged at a lower left position of the movable winning combination device 190, and a middle start winning arranged at a central position. The mouth 28 and the right starting winning opening 27 arranged at the lower right position are provided, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the front surface side of the base plate 60 on the rear surface side thereof.

The general winning opening 63, the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, the middle starting winning opening 28, and the movable ball winning accessory device 190 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game is played. It is fixed from the front side of the board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The game balls thrown into the game area randomly enter the normal winning opening 63, the left starting winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27 in the course of the flow. Alternatively, the player may enter the movable ball-accommodating accessory device 190 at the time of operation (at the time of opening).

The game balls that have entered the respective winning openings are collected to the back side of the game board 13 through the through holes formed in the game board 13.

On the other hand, the game balls that have flowed into the movable ball-accommodating device device 190 are discharged after being distributed after passing through processes such as flow-down, rolling, and ascent inside thereof, and collected on the back side of the game board 13. It The distribution operation in the movable ball winning accessory device 190 will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the game ball enters the left starting winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27), the movable winning accessory device 190 has a predetermined value. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit), it operates to allow the inflow of game balls. That is, the movable ball winning accessory device 190 has a movable piece 190a (so-called blade member) provided at the upper position of the game area, and this movable piece 190a is, for example, a large opening solenoid 209a (see FIG. 4). By the action of the link mechanism using, the reciprocating rotation of a predetermined angle along the board surface.

As shown in the figure, the movable piece 190a is in a substantially upright state and the special winning opening switch 190b is closed, so that the game ball cannot flow into the movable ball winning combination device device 190 at all times. When the movable ball winning device device 190 is actuated, the movable piece 190a is displaced so as to tilt in the left-right direction within the game area around its base end, and the large winning opening switch 190b is opened to move the movable ball winning combination. It allows the game ball to flow into the object device 190 (the game ball enters the special winning opening switch 190b). Since the movable piece 190a and the special winning opening switch 190b are located at the upper position in the game area, particularly near the position at which the game ball is first driven, it is driven into the game area when the movable ball winning agent device 190 is operated. The game ball easily reaches the movable piece 190a by being guided by the nail at the upper position, is guided by the movable piece 190a as it is, and flows into the special winning opening switch 190b.

In addition, the movable ball winning accessory device 190 operates even when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the game ball passes through any specific area provided inside the movable ball winning accessory device 190). , Allows the player to enter the special winning opening switch 190b. The specific area within the movable ball winning accessory device 190 will be further described later.

In the movable ball winning device device 190, the first flow-down device 300 for flowing down the game ball that has flown into the special winning opening switch 190b, and the game that has passed through the finalized region arranged in the first flow-down device 300. And a second flow-down device 400 that distributes a specific area in which the sphere flows down.

All the game balls that have flowed into the movable ball winning combination device device 190 through the special winning opening switch 190b are guided to the inside of the movable winning ball winning device device 190 through the introduction passage 310 of the first downflow device 300. All game balls that have flowed into the movable ball winning combination device 190 are detected by the special winning opening switch 190b.

In addition, in the movable ball winning accessory device 190, a route distributing unit 320 is arranged following the introduction passage 310. The route distribution unit 320 performs a distribution operation for guiding the game ball to the normal route or the special route. If the game ball is guided to the normal route, the probability of a big hit after that is low, but if the game ball is guided to the special route, it will be a big hit after that compared to the case where the game ball is guided to the normal route. The probability of becoming is higher. The details of the route distribution unit 320 will be described later.

Further, in the movable ball winning accessory device 190, a distribution inclination part 350 is arranged following the route distribution part 320. The distribution inclining section 350 allows the game ball, which has entered the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball winning accessory device 190, to pass through a confirmed region where it is confirmed to be guided to a specific region, or to pass through the confirmed region. To decide whether or not to discharge.

Here, the "fixed area" is an area that is always passed before the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the fixed area, the game ball eventually passes through the specific area. Will be done. However, at the time when the game ball passes through the fixed area, it is not a big hit in the strict sense because the game ball has not passed through the specific area yet, but from the player's point of view, the game ball may pass through the fixed area. , A de facto jackpot.

In any case, the distribution inclination part 350 distributes whether the game ball passes through the fixed area or is discharged without passing through the fixed area. The details of the distribution inclination part 350 will be described later.

Further, the second flow-down device 400 is arranged downstream of the first distribution inclination part 350. The second downflow device 400 distributes the game balls that have passed through the fixed area after passing through any one of the plurality of specific areas and then discharging the game balls.

That is, in the distribution sloping portion 350, the distribution such as whether or not to pass the fixed area is performed, but in the second downflow device 400, the game ball in which the actual jackpot is fixed by passing through the fixed area. For that, the distribution of what kind of profit is given is performed. The details of the second flow-down device 400 will be described later.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the middle starting winning opening 28, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving or normal state by a lighting state, or indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating by a lighting state, or a stop symbol. Indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to a small hit by a lighting state, or indicates the number of holding balls by a lighting state, and the 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a big hit or an error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (a lottery on whether or not a game ball flowing down the movable ball winning accessory device 190 passes through a specific region) is performed when a prize is given to the special winning opening switch 190b. .. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 3R jackpot are prepared. On the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, when the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, "16R jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 16 rounds, "7R jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 7 rounds, and "3R jackpot" is The maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 3 rounds.

One round is a unit that divides the number of prize balls for a big hit. In the present embodiment, during one round, the movable piece 190a is tilted, the special winning opening switch 190b is opened, and it ends when 30 seconds elapse or 10 game balls pass through the large winning opening switch 190b. Since one game ball passes through the special winning opening switch 190b, there are 10 prize balls, and thus, about 100 prize balls can be obtained for each round.

In the present embodiment, the first round ends when the game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340 (the fixed area switch 340a at the back of the fixed area switch 340a, see FIG. 5). There is no. That is, a maximum of about 200 prize balls can be obtained with the 3R jackpot, a maximum of about 600 prize balls with the 7R jackpot, and a maximum of about 1500 prize balls with the 16R jackpot.

The time-saving state (time-saving state) means a state in which the ball is likely to win the medium starting winning opening 28 with only the winning probability of the second symbol increased with the big winning probability unchanged. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, which is a game state that is not in a short time (a state in which the winning probability of the second symbol is not increased).

In the present embodiment, a time saving switch 190d (front side of the discharge detection switch 190c) through which the game ball passes after passing through the specific area hole 440 is provided, and the game ball passes through the time saving switch 190d to save time. Move to.

During the time saving, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle starting winning opening 28 is opened is changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. .. When the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (open state), a ball is won in the middle start winning opening 28 as compared to when the electric accessory 28a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the time saving, the ball can easily enter the middle start winning opening 28, and the big winning opening switch 190b can be easily opened.

The time saving switch 190d is arranged in such a manner that only the game ball that has passed through the third specific area hole 443 (see FIG. 23) arranged at the left end among the plurality of specific area holes 440 passes through. As will be described later, in the third specific area hole 443, a third specific area switch 443a (see FIG. 23) is arranged in which the player wins a jackpot (three round jackpot) with the smallest profit among the specific area holes 440. It is a hole.

That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the game ball flowing down the second flow-down device 400 results in a jackpot with the smallest profit (3 round jackpot), by providing a time saving, a supplementary profit is given to the player. Can be granted. On the other hand, in the case of a big jackpot with a larger profit than the three-round jackpot, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessively large by not giving the time saving.

In addition, during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 28a that accompanies the middle start winning opening 28, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 28a per hit. It is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times that is released than usual. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time for which the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle starting winning port 28 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 28a is opened per hit are at least. One may be changed. In addition, during the time saving, the time for which the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning port 28 is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 28a is opened per hit are not changed, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is changed. May be changed so as to increase compared to the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A movable ball winning accessory device 190 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the movable ball winning device device 190, while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, with the winnings (starting winnings) to the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28 as a trigger, A movable piece 190a that opens and closes, and a second symbol display device (not shown) configured by an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of the ball of the through gate 67 are provided. Further, a center frame 86 is arranged in the movable ball winning accessory device 190 so as to surround the outer circumference.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. As a result of the winning lottery, if the result is off, in the second symbol display device, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning port 28 is for a predetermined time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. Thereby, during the time saving, since the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 28a of the medium starting winning opening 28. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to make the state in which the ball can easily win the medium start winning hole 28.

It is to be noted that the ball is likely to win the medium start winning port 28 during the time saving by other methods such as increasing the hit probability during the time saving and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 28a per hit. In this case, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than normal during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the electric winning role for one hit The opening time and the number of times of opening the object 28a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are assembled on the game board on the left and right of the movable ball winning accessory device 190, and a part of the balls shot on the game board can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the movable ball winning accessory device 190.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the movable input. Alternatively, a part of the ball accessory device 190 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the movable ball winning accessory device 190. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of the through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the movable ball winning accessory device 190, and may be, for example, above the movable ball winning accessory device 190. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Left and right starting winning openings 26, 27 through which balls can be won are disposed below and below the movable winning accessory device 190. When a ball wins the right and left starting winning opening 26, 27, the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening switch 210b provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on, and the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening are provided. Lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) due to the mouth switch 210b being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A, and the movable piece 190a is moved a predetermined number of times (book). It is opened once in the embodiment and closed after a predetermined period (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment).

On the other hand, on the center side of the left and right start winning openings 26, 27 in front view, a middle starting winning opening 28 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the middle start winning opening 28, the middle starting winning opening switch 210c provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 (FIG. 4) is caused by turning on the middle starting winning opening switch 210c. Lottery is performed in (see), the display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B, and the movable piece 190a repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment) (opening period). Is 0.5 seconds, and the interval between the first and second times is 2 seconds).

Each of the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28 is drawn so that the winning prize is 1/1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, there is no lottery for jackpots due to the game balls passing through the respective start winning openings 26, 27, 28. After the lottery, the movable piece 190a repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times after a randomly selected opening period (1 to 5 seconds).

In addition, the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are winning in the middle starting winning opening 28. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the left and right starting prize holes 26 and 27 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is winning in the middle starting prize hole 28, for example, a left and right starting prize. The number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls are won in the mouths 26 and 27 may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls are to be won in the medium start winning hole 28 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 28a is attached to the middle start winning opening 28. The electric accessory 28a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric accessory 28a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the middle start winning opening 28. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is carried out upon the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the medium start winning opening 28.

As mentioned above, during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, the symbol “○” is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol. Is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 28a is opened is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the medium start winning port 28 as compared with the normal time.

The probability of being a 16R jackpot as a type of jackpot that is selected when it is a jackpot is set higher when the ball is won at the middle starting winning opening 28 than when the ball is winning at the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27. (A plurality of game balls are collectively put in the movable ball winning device device 190 for easy entry). On the other hand, the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27 do not have an electric accessory as in the middle starting winning opening 28, and balls are always ready for winning.

A special winning opening switch 190b is arranged above the movable ball winning accessory device 190. In the pachinko machine 10, due to the fact that the game ball that has entered the movable ball winning accessory device 190 has passed through the specific area hole 440 after winning the right and left starting winning openings 26, 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28. When it becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the jackpot is stopped, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is movably inserted. It is displayed on a part of the ball accessory device 190 to show the occurrence of a big hit. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit, big hit game) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the movable piece 190a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The special winning opening switch 190b is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the special winning opening switch 190b is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the special winning opening switch 190b can be repeated at most 15 times (for 16 rounds excluding the first round). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The big winning opening which is opened and closed separately from the big winning opening switch 190b is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is turned on, the big winning opening switch 190b is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening switch 190b, a big opening provided separately from the special winning opening switch 190b is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball wins into the special winning opening switch 190b. The gaming state may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the special winning opening switch 190b is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also limited to the upper side of the movable ball winning combination device device 190. Instead, for example, it may be below the left and right start winning openings 26, 27.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls flowing down the game area that have not won any of the winning openings 26, 27, 28, 63 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the outlet 71. In addition, all the game balls that have been hit in the game area, including the game balls that have entered the movable ball winning device device 190, are collected on the back side of the game board 13. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to the outside of the frame through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply route of island equipment (not shown).

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

An example of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. The purpose of the game of the present embodiment is to pass the game ball through the specific area hole 440, shift the game state to the special game state, and obtain a prize ball. Therefore, the player adjusts the strength of the game ball and shoots it so that the game ball slides down on the upper surface of the center frame 86. As a result, when the game ball hits each of the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28 while hitting a large number of nails, the movable piece 190a is opened. At this time, if the game ball can be inserted into the movable ball winning accessory device 190 at a good timing, the game ball will pass through the specific area hole 440 depending on the subsequent flow of the game ball, so that the player can play the game ball. You can visually check the flow of the game and see if you can get a big jackpot or lose it while watching the actual movement of the game ball.

That is, the first condition for obtaining a jackpot is to open the movable piece 190a, and the second condition is to allow the game ball to enter the movable ball winning combination device 190 when the movable piece 190b is opened.

Therefore, in order to obtain a big hit in the present embodiment, the hitting method in which the game ball cannot reach the center frame 86 (so-called "slow hitting") and the hitting method in which the return rubber 69 can reach (so-called "right hitting") are achieved. Is at a disadvantage.

In addition, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which it is easy to obtain a big hit when the two game balls are simultaneously entered in the movable ball winning combination device 190. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball toward the upper end portion (triangular apex portion) of the center frame 86 to disperse the game ball to the left and right, and when the movable piece 190b is opened, it is 1 Aiming to enter a total of two balls, one by one, this makes it possible to play a game so that a jackpot can be easily obtained.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 executes main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 stores, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main process (see FIG. 119) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 118). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 117) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the movable piece 190a of the special winning opening switch 190b. Is connected to various solenoid motors 209 such as a large opening solenoid 209a for driving to open and close to the left and right around the axis, an electric accessory solenoid 209b for driving the electric accessory 28a, or a motor, and the MPU 201 is Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the input/output port 205.

Various direct switches 210, which are different from the various switches 208 and are directly involved in the profit given to the player, are directly connected to the MPU 201 without passing through the input/output port 205.

The various solenoid motors 209 are, at least, a large opening opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing left and right around the lower side of the movable piece 190a of the special winning opening switch 190b as an axis, and an opening and closing rotation driving for the electric accessory 28a. An electric accessory solenoid 209b, a stay solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) that drives the downflow prevention plate 412, and a drive motor 421b (see FIG. 23) that drives the movable plate 421a are provided.

The various direct switches 210 include a left start winning opening switch 210a (see FIG. 2), a right starting winning opening switch 210b (see FIG. 2), a middle starting winning opening switch 210c (see FIG. 2), and a first specific area switch. 441a (see FIG. 23), a second specific area switch 442a (see FIG. 23), and a third specific area switch 443a (see FIG. 23) are included.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the 7-segment display, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The power supply unit 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as various solenoids and motors 209, motors and the like. Voltage, 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are set to the necessary voltage for each control device 110-114, etc. Supply.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

5 to 9 are diagrams showing details of the configuration of the first downflow device 300, FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the first downflow device 300, and FIG. 6 is a front view of the first downflow device 300. 7 is a side view of the first downflow device 300 in the direction of arrow VII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 8 is a top view of the first downflow device 300 in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 7. FIG. 9 is a partial rear perspective view of the first flow-down device 300.

5 and 6, the illustration of the front side wall of the introduction passage 310 and the front side wall of the root distribution unit 320 is omitted for easy understanding (that is, the game ball is inside the introduction passage 310). And, it flows down the inside of the route distribution unit 320, and is not a mode in which the game ball falls off toward the front side (front side in FIG. 5).

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 9, the first downflow device 300 is a pair of introduction passages 310 for guiding the game balls that have passed through the special winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2), and the end position of the introduction passages 310. A root distribution unit 320 that is connected to the introduction passage 310 at the (horizontal direction central position) and flows down the game ball, and a distribution inclination unit 330 that flows down the game ball sent from the route distribution unit 320 to the front, A fixed area hole 340 that is a hole that is large enough to allow one game ball to be placed on the front side of the distribution inclined portion 330 in the center of the distribution inclined portion 330 in the left-right direction, and the fixed area hole 340. A deviation hole 350 that is larger than the defined area hole 340 at a position that is deviated from the left to the right is mainly provided.

The introduction passage 310 is a passage that is formed symmetrically with an inner diameter through which a game ball can pass, is inclined downward toward the root distribution unit 320 arranged in the center, and its end position (route distribution). A first projecting portion 311 and a second projecting portion 312 are provided at a connection portion (connecting portion with the portion 320).

The first protrusion 311 is a protrusion that protrudes upward in the front-rear width direction of the introduction passage 310. The game ball decelerates by contacting the first protrusion 311.

The second projecting portion 312 is an inclined surface portion that limits the downflow direction of the game ball sent from the introduction passage 310 toward the root distribution portion 320, and is connected to the bottom surface of the exit of the introduction passage 310 and descends in the left-right direction. It is extended in an inclined manner.

The route allocator 320 performs an allocating operation for allocating the incoming game balls to a normal flow path (normal route) or a special flow path (special route). In addition, the route distribution unit 320 is a route distribution unit guide path 321, a distribution body 322 that rotates when a game ball abuts, and a pair of special routes opened in the left-right direction of the distribution body 322. Hole 323, hole 324 for normal route that is opened rearward below sorter 322, and special route guideway 325 that causes the game ball that has passed through hole 323 for special route to flow down toward distribution inclined portion 350. And a normal route guideway 326 for mainly flowing down the game ball that has passed through the normal route hole 324 toward the distribution inclination part 350.

The route distribution part guide path 321 is a passage extending vertically downward for guiding the game balls from the introduction passage 310 to the distribution body 322, and is formed with a width that allows two game balls to be arranged laterally side by side. ..

The distribution body 322 is a member that is rotatably supported, and is a fan-shaped portion 322a having a fan-shaped cross section that is arranged below the rotation shaft in the equilibrium state (see FIG. 6), and a circumferential intermediate portion of the fan-shaped portion 322a. It mainly includes a plate-shaped portion 322b extending from the position in the direction passing through the rotation axis (upward in FIG. 5) and integrally formed with the fan-shaped portion 322a.

As shown in FIG. 6, the fan-shaped portion 322a has a shape that guides (flows into) the game ball into the special route hole 323 in a balanced state (a shape in which the left and right flat surfaces extend toward the special route hole 323). To be done.

The plate-shaped portion 322b has a first angular state (see FIG. 11B) and a second angular state (see FIG. 11C), which will be described later, when the distributor 322 is placed in a state between the first angular state and the second angular state (see FIG. 11C). The distance between the two protrusions 312 is extended to a length at least equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball.

The special route hole 323 is a through hole formed in the side wall of the route distribution unit 320, and is arranged as a pair of through holes opened in the left-right direction of the distribution body 322. The special route hole 323 guides the game ball entering the special route hole 323 to the special route guideway 325. The special route guideway 325 is provided with special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, and the game balls that enter the special route hole 323 are detected by the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1.

The normal route hole 324 is a through hole formed in the rear wall portion near the bottom wall portion of the route distribution unit 320. The normal route hole 324 has a heap portion 324a formed at the center thereof to reduce the opening height. The height of the center of the normal route hole 324 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball by this heap portion 324a, so that the game ball avoids the center part of the normal route hole 324 and the left and right sides of the normal route hole 324. Pass through the edge.

The special route guideway 325 includes a left guideway 325a and a right guideway 325b which extend from the pair of special route holes 323, respectively, and these are formed left-right symmetrically and asymmetrically in the front-rear direction.

That is, the left guide path 325a includes a left detection switch 325a1 for detecting passage of a game ball inside thereof, and extends toward the front side and then extends vertically downward, while the right guide path 325b is A right detection switch 325b1 for detecting passage of a game ball is provided inside, and extends vertically downward without extending to the front side. By changing the arrangement of the front and rear in this way, when the game ball passes through the pair of special route holes 323 at the same time, it is possible to prevent the game ball landed on the distribution inclined portion 330 from colliding in the left-right direction. You can This makes it easier for the game ball that has passed through the special route guideway 325 to pass through the fixed area.

The special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 are sensors that detect passage of a game ball. By checking the detection signals of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, it is possible to determine how many balls the game ball has passed through the special route.

It should be noted that the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 may be used as a trigger for performance execution. For example, when a game ball passes through both of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds in the present embodiment), a plurality of game balls then pass through the fixed area hole 340, which is on the more advantageous side. Because it is easy to hit the jackpot, if it detects that the game ball has passed both of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, the player's interest can be enhanced by inciting intense eyes (intense light emission, sound effect). ..

On the other hand, if the game ball is detected only in one of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 due to the irregular flow of the game ball, even if the game ball passes through the defined area hole 340, which jackpot It is not known (whether it will be a big hit on the side with the most prize balls), so it is possible to slightly increase the interest of the player by performing a modest agitation (moderate light emission, sound effect).

Further, for example, when repeatedly detecting that a game ball has entered one of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 (for example, three consecutive detections), an improper fixing of the sorting body 322 by some method may be performed. By determining that the game is being performed and issuing an error, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating.

Since the exit of the special route guideway 325 is arranged near the front end of the distribution inclined part 330, the game ball discharged from the special route guideway 325 hits the protrusion 331 of the distribution inclined part 330. It flows down toward the center of the front without touching.

The normal route guideway 326 extends rearward from both left and right ends of the normal route hole 324 while inclining outward in the left-right direction, and extends vertically downward at the rear end thereof. Since the exit of the normal route guideway 326 is arranged near the rear end of the distribution inclined part 330, the game ball discharged from the normal route guideway 326 hits the protrusion 331 of the distribution inclined part 330. While touching, it flows down toward the front side.

The distribution slanting portion 330 is a slanting surface portion whose cross section in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction is formed by a depressed central portion, and a plurality of protrusions 331 are provided in a protruding manner in the middle portion.

A plurality of the protrusions 331 are inclined in a direction toward the left and right ends toward the front side, and a plurality of protrusions 331 have a gap about the diameter of the game ball in the middle portion. Therefore, while most of the game balls discharged from the normal route guideway 326 are flown toward the left and right ends by the protrusion 331, some game balls pass through the gap and head toward the fixed area hole 340.

The protruding portion 331 is arranged rearward (upstream of the distribution inclined portion 330) from the position where the game ball discharged from the special route guideway 325 contacts the distribution inclined portion 330. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the special route guideway 325 can flow down to the front side while heading to the center along the curved shape of the distribution inclination part 330 without colliding with the protrusion 331, It becomes easy to pass through the area hole 340.

On the other hand, since the game ball discharged from the normal route guideway 326 flows down the distribution inclined part 330 while colliding with the protrusion 331, whether or not the game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340 is a random flow of the game ball. It is up to the sex. In the present embodiment, since the deviation holes 350 arranged on the left and right of the fixed area hole 340 are opened larger than the fixed area hole 340, the game balls discharged from the normal route guide path 326 easily pass through the deviation hole 350. Become.

That is, in the present embodiment, a gaming ball passing through the special route guiding path 325 can pass through the fixed area hole 340 more easily than a gaming ball passing through the normal route guiding path 326. ..

It should be noted that the game ball that has entered the fixed area hole 340 will then pass through the fixed area, and the game ball that has entered the outlying hole 350 will be subsequently discharged without passing through the specific area. Become.

Here, a fixed area switch 340a (see FIG. 5) is provided in the fixed area, and a game ball passing through the fixed area is detected by the fixed area switch 340a. In addition, an out passage (not shown) is formed at the lower edge of the movable ball winning accessory device 190 (see FIG. 2). For this reason, the game ball that has entered the outlying hole 350 without entering the fixed area hole 340 is guided to the out passage, and is discharged from the movable ball winning accessory device 190 without passing through the fixed area or the specific area. It Then, the game ball flowing down the out passage is configured to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c, and the game ball passing through the out passage is detected by the discharge detection switch 190c. In the present embodiment, the game balls that have passed through the fixed area hole 340 also merge into the out passage and pass through the discharge detection switch 190c.

The discharge detection switch 190c detects a difference in the number detected with the game ball that has entered the special winning opening switch 190b, and the difference disappears within a predetermined period (for example, within 15 seconds), so that the game is stably played. It is a switch to confirm that it is open. For example, when the game balls are deposited on the protrusion 331 of the distribution inclined part 330 and the discharge of the game balls is delayed, it is possible to determine that a game ball discharge error has occurred and issue an alarm.

The distribution body 322 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution body 322, and FIGS. 11A to 11C are front views of the distribution body 322. 10 and 11(a) show the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322, and in FIG. 11(b), the distribution body 322 is rotated clockwise from the equilibrium state by the first angle θ1. The angular state is illustrated, and FIG. 11C illustrates the second angular state in which the distributor 322 is rotated clockwise from the first angular state by the second angle θ2. In addition, in FIGS. 11A to 11C, a partial cross-sectional view of the distributor 322 at an intermediate position in the axial direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 11) is enlarged and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 10, the distributor 322 includes a fan-shaped portion 322a, a plate-shaped portion 322b, and a pair of annular connecting rings that connect the fan-shaped portion 322a and the plate-shaped portion 322b at front and rear end portions. A portion 322c and an inner circumference of the connecting ring portion 322c and an inner circumference that is a surface position are provided and extend in the front-rear direction (axial direction of the distributor 322) between the pair of connecting ring portions 322c. A resistance extension part 322d formed by a split ring shape in which a cross section perpendicular to the extension direction is divided into halves, and a pair of connection ring parts 322c are connected in a phase range in which the resistance extension part 322d is not formed. On the rear side wall of the root distribution unit 320, which is a bar-shaped member that communicates with the separated center portion 322e that is recessed radially outward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring portion 322c, and the pair of connection ring portions 322c. Mainly includes a shaft support rod 322f to be fixed.

The shaft support rod 322f is a member that is adhesively fixed to the rear side wall of the root distribution unit 320 and extends to the vicinity of the front side wall (not shown), and is configured of a columnar shape having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting ring portion 322c. And a connecting rod portion 322f2 that is a rod-shaped member that connects the shaft supporting columnar portion 322f1 and that has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the cross-sectional shape of the shaft supporting columnar portion 322f1.

The pair of shaft support columnar portions 322f1 are arranged coaxially, and the spacing between them in the axial direction is the same as the spacing between the coupling ring portions 322c. Accordingly, since the pair of coupling column portions 322c can be supported by the pair of shaft supporting columnar portions 322f1, the shaft supporting state can be stabilized, and the rotating states of the fan-shaped portion 322a and the plate-shaped portion 322b can be stabilized. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod portion 322f2 has a lower substantially half-circumferential portion which is a surface position with the outer periphery of the shaft supporting columnar portion 322f1, and an upper substantially semicircular portion which is recessed radially inward. The purpose will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the distribution body 322 is in a state between the equilibrium state (see FIG. 11A) and the first angle state (see FIG. 11B). In this case, since the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d are separated from each other, frictional resistance is generated between the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d even if the distributor 322 starts rotating. Absent. Therefore, in the state from the equilibrium state to the first angle state, the distributor 322 can be configured to rotate easily (rotational resistance can be suppressed).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C, the distributor 322 has the first angular state (see FIG. 11B) and the second angular state (see FIG. 11C). In the case between the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d, the area in which the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d contact each other becomes larger toward the second angle state. The resulting frictional resistance can be increased. Therefore, as compared with the state from the equilibrium state to the first angle state, it is possible to make it difficult for the distributor 322 to rotate (the rotation resistance can be increased).

Therefore, when the game ball comes into contact with the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 can be quickly rotated at the start of contact, and the distribution body 322 can be rotated in a mode in which the momentum of rotation is gradually weakened.

The distribution operation of the route distribution unit 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 22. First, with reference to FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, a case where one game ball A1 flows into the route distribution unit 320 will be described. FIG. 12A, FIG. 12B and FIG. 13 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. 12A shows the equilibrium state of the distributor 322, FIG. 12B shows the first angular state of the distributor 322, and FIG. 13 shows the second angular state of the distributor 322. At the same time, the flow down of the game ball A1 is illustrated in time series.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the game ball A1 that has flowed down the introduction passage 310 passes over the first protrusion 311 while being abutted against the first protrusion 311 and the speed in the left-right direction is decelerated, and the second protrusion is generated. It flows downward along the inclined surface of the portion 312 (toward the shaft support rod 322f). Therefore, the game ball A1 is prevented from vigorously being sent to the left from the introduction passage 310 and getting over the distribution body 322, and landed at the left and right end portions of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). Is prevented.

From the state shown in FIG. 12(a), when the game ball A1 rolls down on the upper surface of the second protruding portion 312a and flows down, the game ball A1 flows down along the arrow A1x shown in FIG. 12(b), It rolls along the inclination of the fan-shaped part 322a and reaches the position shown in FIG. 12B (the position close to the special route hole 323).

Here, since the distribution body 322 has a small rotational resistance from the equilibrium state shown in FIG. 12A to the first angle state shown in FIG. 12B, the game ball A1 becomes the distribution body 322. By landing, the distribution body 322 rotates by the weight of the game ball A1. Therefore, the game ball A1 is suppressed from being bounced from the distribution body 322 (absorbed), and flows down in a mode in which the distribution body 322 is pushed.

As shown in FIG. 12B, the game ball A1 rolls on the upper surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a until the distribution body 322 is in the first angle state (in this embodiment, about 0.5 seconds). Then, it flows downward to the right and reaches the front side of the special route hole 323 (left side in FIG. 12B). In this state, since the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the surface on which the game ball A1 is mounted) is sunk below the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323, the game ball A1 passes through the special route hole 323. Is prevented.

After that, the distribution body 322 is further rotated by the load given from the game ball A1, and the game ball A1 is separated from the distribution body 322 by being in the second angle state shown in FIG. 13 (about 2 seconds in this embodiment). It falls off toward the normal route hole 324.

That is, when one game ball A1 flows into the route distribution unit 320, the game ball A1 passes through the normal route hole 324.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15, a case will be described in which two game balls A2 and A3 simultaneously flow into the root distribution unit 320 from the left and right. 14(a), 14(b) and 15 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. 14(a), 14(b), and 15, the balanced state of the distribution body 322 is illustrated, and the flow down of the game balls A2 and A3 is illustrated in time series.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the game balls A2 and A3 that have flowed down the introduction passage 310 come into contact with the first protruding portion 311 to overcome the first protruding portion 311 while being decelerated in the speed in the left-right direction. 2 It flows downward along the inclined surface of the protruding portion 312 (toward the shaft support rod 322f).

Therefore, it is prevented that the game balls A2 and A3 are strongly sent to the left and right from the introduction passage 310 and get over the distribution body 322, and the left and right end portions of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). Landing on the ground is prevented.

From the state shown in FIG. 14(a), when the game balls A2 and A3 roll down on the upper surface of the second protrusion 312a and flow down, the game balls A2 and A3 are changed to arrows A1x and A2x shown in FIG. 14(b). After flowing down along, it lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a. The arrow A2x is a left-right inverted arrow of the arrow A1x.

Here, since the load applied to the distribution body 322 in the rotation direction about the shaft support rod 322f is balanced, the rotation of the distribution body 322 is suppressed and the distribution body 322 maintains the equilibrium state. Even while the game balls A2 and A3 flow down to the left and right along the inclination of the upper surface of the fan-shaped part 322a, the game balls A2 and A3 are in the same flow-down mode, so that the sorting body 322 is maintained in an equilibrium state. Therefore, the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the surface on which the game balls A2 and A3 are mounted) is prevented from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without any step), and the game ball. A2 and A3 flow into the special route hole 323.

That is, when the two game balls A2 and A3 simultaneously flow into the route distribution unit 320, the game balls A2 and A3 pass through the special route hole 323.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16 to FIG. 18, a case where two game balls A4 and A5 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a timing slightly shifted from the left and right (for example, a timing shifted 0.5 seconds) will be described. To do. 16(a), 16(b), 17(a), 17(b) and 18 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. Note that in FIG. 16(a), the equilibrium state of the distributor 322 is in FIG. 16(b), the first angular state of the distributor 322 is in FIG. 17(a), and in FIG. As a state between the angular state and the second angular state, in FIG. 17B, the distribution body 322 is a state between the first angular state and the equilibrium state, and in FIG. 18, the distribution body 322 is in the equilibrium state. However, the flow of the game balls A4 and A5 is illustrated in chronological order as well as being illustrated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the opening period of the movable piece 190b is 0.5 seconds, a game ball that enters with one opening does not cause a time delay of 0.5 seconds or more, so this example Is an example in which the game sphere is displaced by the maximum displacement width (for example, one game sphere A4 enters immediately after the opening of the movable piece 190b, and the other game sphere A5 enters immediately before the closing of the movable piece 190b. Will be an example of a ball).

As shown in FIG. 16(a), the game balls A4 and A5 that have flowed down the introduction passage 310 come into contact with the first protrusion 311 to overcome the first protrusion 311 while being decelerated in the speed in the left-right direction. 2 It flows downward along the inclined surface of the protruding portion 312 (toward the shaft support rod 322f).

Therefore, the game balls A4 and A5 are prevented from being vigorously fed to the left and right from the introduction passage 310 and crossing over the distribution body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). Landing on the ground is prevented.

From the state shown in FIG. 16(a), when the previous game ball A4 rolls down on the upper surface of the second protruding portion 312a and flows down, it flows down along the arrow A1x and then lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a. Then, the sorting body 322 rotates clockwise and enters the first angle state shown in FIG.

From the state shown in FIG. 16B until the game ball A5 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 further rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game ball A4, but FIG. In the state shown in a) (between the first angle state and the second angle state), the rotation resistance of the distribution body 322 increases and the rotation speed decreases, so that the distribution body 322 reaches the second angle state. The period can be extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball A4 from falling off the distribution body 322 due to the distribution body 322 being in the second angle state before the later game ball A5 lands on the distribution body 322.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the game ball A5 lands on the fan-shaped portion 322b, loads are applied to the distribution body 322 from both directions of rotation, and the loads in the rotation direction are balanced (canceled). As shown in FIG. 17B, the distributor 322 approaches the equilibrium state. Further, as the loads applied from the game balls A4 and A5 to the distribution body 322 are balanced with each other, the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state as shown in FIG. 18, so that the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (game ball The surface on which A2 and A3 are mounted is prevented from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without steps), and the game balls A4 and A5 are flowed into the special route hole 323. It

That is, when the two game balls A4 and A5 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a slightly shifted timing, the game balls A4 and A5 pass through the special route hole 323. In this way, the sorting body 322 in the Hong embodiment absorbs the deviation even when the plurality of game balls arrive with a time delay of 0.5 seconds which is the opening period of the movable piece 190a, and the special route hole. It is configured in such a manner that a game ball can be sent to 323.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, a case where the two game balls A6 and A7 successively flow into the route distribution unit 320 from one side will be described. 19(a), 19(b), 20(a), and 20(b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. 19A, the equilibrium state of the distributor 322, the first angular state of the distributor 322 in FIG. 19B, and the first distribution state of the distributor 322 in FIG. 20A. As the state between the angular state and the second angular state, in FIG. 20(b), the distribution body 322 is shown as the state between the first angular state and the equilibrium state, respectively, and the game ball A6. The flow down of A7 is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the game balls A6 and A7 flowing down the introduction passage 310 come into contact with the first projecting portion 311 to overcome the first projecting portion 311 while being decelerated in the speed in the left-right direction. 2 It flows downward along the inclined surface of the protruding portion 312 (toward the shaft support rod 322f).

Therefore, it is prevented that the game balls A6 and A7 are strongly fed to the left and right from the introduction passage 310 and get over the distribution body 322, and the left and right end portions of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). Landing on the ground is prevented.

Further, when the game balls A6 and A7 continuously flow down the introduction passage 310, in the state where the game ball A6 contacts the first protrusion 311 and is decelerated, the rear side of the game ball A6 (right of FIG. 19A). The game ball A7 is decelerated while being in contact with the game ball A6, and after the game ball A6 has passed over the first protrusion 311 and flows down again, the game ball A7 is again contacted with the first protrusion 311 and decelerated. As a result, a gap is provided between the first game ball A6 and the second game ball A7 (about 1 second in the present embodiment).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19B, after the game ball A6 flows down along the arrow A1x, the game ball A6 lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a and the distribution body 322 is rotated to the first angle state. However, it is in a state where it is in the middle of getting over the first protrusion 311.

From the state shown in FIG. 19B until the game ball A7 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 further rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game ball A6. In the state shown in a) (between the first angle state and the second angle state), the rotation resistance of the distribution body 322 increases and the rotation speed decreases, so that the distribution body 322 reaches the second angle state. The period can be extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball A6 from falling off the distribution body 322 due to the distribution body 322 being in the second angle state before the later game ball A7 lands on the distribution body 322.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20A, the distribution body 322 is further rotated clockwise by the load of the game ball A6, so that the tip of the plate-shaped portion 322b approaches the second protrusion 312 on the right side. .. In this state, the game ball A7 rolls down the inclined surface of the second projecting portion 312 and flows down along the arrow A1x, rolling on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 322b, and the game ball A7 of the distribution body 322. Land on the left side. That is, the game balls A6 and A7 can be distributed to the left and right of the distribution body 322 by the plate-shaped portion 322b.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball A7 flows down at a speed toward the rotation center of the sorting body 311 by the second protrusion 312, so that the rotation angle of the plate-shaped portion 322b is insufficient (for example, FIG. Even if the game ball A7 flows downward from the second protrusion 312 in the state shown in (b)), the game ball A7 is supported by the tip portion of the plate-shaped portion 322b (between the second protrusion 312). The game ball A7 can be surely caused to flow down to the left side of the sorting body 322 by further rotating the sorting body 322 clockwise from there.

As shown in FIG. 20A, when the game ball A7 lands on the left side portion of the fan-shaped portion 322b, loads are applied to the distribution body 322 from both directions of rotation, and the loads in the rotation direction are balanced (cancellation). 20B, the distributor 322 approaches the equilibrium state, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the load applied to the distribution body 322 from the game balls A6 and A57 balances each other, so that the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state. Therefore, the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the game balls A6 and A7 are on it). The surface) is prevented from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without steps), and the game balls A6 and A7 flow into the special route hole 323.

That is, when the two game balls A6 and A7 continuously flow into the route distribution unit 320 from one side, the game balls A6 and A7 pass through the special route hole 323.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, a case will be described in which the two game balls A8 and A9 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a greatly shifted timing (about 2 seconds in this embodiment). Note that, in such a state, for example, the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) is opened twice with one actuation trigger, and each time it is opened once, one gaming ball is provided and one big winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) is provided. ) Is formed when entering the ball.

21(a), 21(b) and 22 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. It should be noted that, in FIG. 21A, the second angular state of the distributor 322 is the state between FIG. 21B and the distributor 322 is between the first angular state and the second angular state. Then, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is illustrated, and the flow down of the game balls A8 and A9 is illustrated in a time series.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the distribution body 322 is in the second angle state due to the load of the game ball A8, and after the game ball A8 is dropped, the distribution body 322 starts to rotate toward the equilibrium state. However, since the rotational resistance is increased between the second angle state and the first angle state, the distributor 322 rotates slowly.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21B, the game ball A9 lands on the distribution body 322 in the state from the first angle state to the second angle state. Here, since the rotation resistance of the distribution body 322 is large, the game ball A9 does not cause an operation of pushing the distribution body 322 like the case where the game ball A9 lands on the distribution body 322 in the equilibrium state. Bounces on the inclined surface of the sorting body 322 and the angular state of the sorting body 322 is maintained between the first angular state and the second angular state.

Therefore, as soon as the game ball A9 lands on the distribution body 322, the balance body 322 does not pass through the equilibrium state and the distribution body 322 faces the left and right sides, and the distribution body 322 rotates slowly. Therefore, after arranging the game ball A9 along the inclination of the fan-shaped portion 322b on the side close to the special route hole 323 (on the left and right end sides of the fan-shaped portion 322a), the sorting body 322 should reach the equilibrium state. You can As a result, as shown in FIG. 22B, the distribution body 322 can be in an equilibrium state and the game ball A9 can be caused to flow into the special route hole 323 at the same time.

That is, when the two game balls A8 and A9 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a greatly shifted timing (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), the previous game ball A8 passes through the normal route hole 324. After that, the game ball A9 passes through the special route hole 323.

In order to achieve this, in the present embodiment, the game ball abuts the distribution body 322 to change the distribution body 322 from the equilibrium state to the second angle state and then returns to the first angle state. The period (about 4 seconds) is set to be equal to or longer than the interval (2 seconds in the present embodiment) from closing when the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) is opened twice.

In the present embodiment, it takes 4 seconds to 5 for the game ball that has passed through the normal route hole 324 to pass through the normal route guideway 326 and the distribution slope portion 330 and reach the fixed area hole 340. Designed to fit in seconds. In addition, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the special route hole 323 to reach the fixed area hole 340 after passing through the special route guideway 325 and the distribution inclination part 330 is set to be 2 seconds to 3 seconds. Designed.

That is, for example, in FIG. 21(a), when both the game balls A8 and A9 reach the finalized region hole 340, the game ball A8 will be in the finalized region about 4 seconds to 5 seconds after the state of FIG. 21(a). After reaching the hole 340, the game ball A9 is about 2 seconds to 3 seconds after the state of FIG. 21(b) which is a state about 0.5 seconds after the state shown in FIG. 21(a) (FIG. From the state of 21(a), the fixed area hole 340 is reached from 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds later (equilibrium state is reached in about 1 second, and then fixed in 1.5 seconds to 2.5 seconds). Reach area hole 340). Therefore, the game balls A8 and A9 reach the fixed area hole 340 with a shift of at most 2.5 seconds.

In this way, when two game balls enter the movable ball winning combination device 190 by one small win lottery, the maximum deviation interval when those game balls reach the fixed area hole 340 is: It is set to about 2.5 seconds. Based on this, the overhang period of the stay solenoid 413 of the second downstream device 400, which will be described later, is set to 5 seconds. As a result, it is possible to reliably carry out the retention of the plurality of game balls at the flow-down prevention plate 412 and then the flow-down again.

Next, the second flow-down device 400 in which the game balls that have passed through the fixed area holes 340 (see FIG. 5) of the first flow-down device 300 flow down will be described.

FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the second downflow device 400, and FIG. 24 is a front view of the second downflow device 400. As shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the second downflow device 400 is a device configured of a plurality of branched flow paths to flow down the game balls that have passed through the defined area holes 340 (see FIG. 5), and the flow path is The first branch region 410 that branches into two and the region where the game ball that has flowed down the second branch guiding flow channel R2, which is the upper flow channel branched by the first branch region 410, reaches and the flow channel is The game ball that has flowed down the second branch region 420 that branches into two and the third branch guiding flow channel R3 that is the lower flow channel branched by the first branch region 410 arrives and the second branch flow channel 420 A third branch area 430 in which the game ball that has flowed down the special guidance flow path R4, which is the front-side flow path that is branched in, and the flow path branches into two, and a plurality of game balls that are discharged The specific basin hole 440 and is mainly provided, and the guidance flow paths R1 to R6 for guiding the game balls are connected to the respective branch regions 410 to 430.

The first branch guide flow path R1 is a flow path for guiding the game ball that has passed through the fixed area hole 340 (see FIG. 5), and extends to the lower right, and then slightly deviates to the right from the vertical direction ( It is a flow path that extends in a downwardly sloping direction toward the lower right) and is connected to the first branch region 410 from above. That is, the game ball is flown into the first branch region 410 along a direction in which the game ball deviates slightly from the vertical direction to the right (obliquely lower right direction). In the present embodiment, the first branch guide flow path R1 is configured to discharge the inflowing game balls to the first branch area 410 in a maximum of 3 seconds.

The second branch guiding flow path R2 is an upper flow path branched from the first branch area 410, extends downward leftward, and is connected to the second branch area 420 from the right side.

The third branch guiding flow path R3 is a lower flow path branched from the first branch region 410, extends in a direction in which it descends and slopes toward the front side, and then extends in a direction in which it slopes down to the left. After extending and further extending vertically downward, the third branch region 430 is connected from above.

The special guide flow passage R4 is a front side flow passage branched from the second branch region 420, extends vertically downward, and then joins a portion extending vertically of the third branch guide flow passage R3 from above. To do. It takes one second after the game sphere flows into the special guidance flow path R4 to reach the distribution protrusion 431 and to flow the game sphere to either the left or right flow path.

The first delay guiding flow path R5 is a flow path on the right side branched from the third branch area 430, extends to the lower right, and has the second specific area hole 442 at the lower end.

The second delay guiding flow path R6 is a back-side flow path branched from the second branch area 420, extends downward to the left, and has a third specific area hole 443 at the left end.

As shown in FIG. 24, the third branch guiding flow path R3 has a longer path than the second branch guiding flow path R2, while the inclination angle is increased. Therefore, the flow-down positions (left and right positions) of the game balls flowing down the respective guide flow paths R2 and R3 can be made uniform. In this embodiment, two game balls sent from the first branch region 410 to the second branch guiding flow channel R2 and the third branch guiding flow channel R3 at the same time stay in the second branch guiding flow channel R2. The shape of the flow path is designed so that, when the ball is entered into the special guiding flow path R4 instead, the contact is made in the vertical direction at the merging position.

As shown in FIG. 24, the first delay guiding flow path R5 has a larger inclination angle and a shorter extension length than the second delay guiding flow path R6. That is, in comparison with the case where the game ball passes through the first delay guiding flow path R5 (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), the case where the game ball passes through the second delay guiding flow path R6 (about this embodiment) The stay time of the game ball becomes longer in (5 seconds). In addition, a plurality of deceleration protrusions for decelerating the game ball are provided on the bottom surface of each of the guide channels R5 and R6.

The specific area holes 440 are the first specific area holes 441 arranged in the left side flow path branched from the third branch area 430 and the second specific area arranged in the lower end portion of the first delay guiding flow path R5. A region hole 442 and a third specific region hole 443 arranged at the left end of the second delay guiding flow path R6 are mainly provided.

The 1st specific area hole 441 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the 1st specific area for 16 round big hits, and the 1st specific area switch 441a is arranged directly under it. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 441a.

The 2nd specific area hole 442 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the 2nd specific area for 7 round big hits, and the 2nd specific area switch 442a is arrange|positioned just under that. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second specific area hole 442 and passing through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 442a.

The third specific area hole 443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for three-round big hit, and the third specific area switch 443a is arranged directly below the hole. Thereby, the game ball passing through the third specific area hole 443 and the third specific area is detected by the third specific area switch 443a.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, for example, even when the game ball passes through the first specific region while the game ball passes through the third specific region and the effect of three rounds of big hits is being executed. , The game ball is invalid (because the processing of the 3R jackpot is already running, it is not interrupted), and the effect of the 16 round jackpot is not executed. Therefore, it has been a cause of player dissatisfaction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the game ball can pass through a plurality of specific regions, the game ball first passes through the specific region with the larger profit for the player. It The details will be described later.

The configuration of the first branch region 410 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a partial front view of the second downflow device 400 in the range XXV of FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, the first branch region 410 is in contact with the game ball that has flowed down the first branch guide flow path R1 from the right side, and the contact wall 411 that reflects the game ball toward the second branch flow path R2. And a flow-down prevention configured to be capable of appearing and disappearing in such a manner that the state is switched between an overhanging state in which the second branching guiding flow path R2 and the third branching guiding flow path R3 are projected inward, and a retracted state where the second branch guiding flow path R3 is retracted outward. A plate 412 and a stay solenoid 413 that drives the flow-down prevention plate 412 and is arranged on the back side of the second branch guiding flow path R2 are provided.

The contact wall 411 is a side wall extending vertically upward with a length equal to or smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the distribution of the game balls can be changed depending on whether the number of the game balls coming toward the contact wall 411 is one or not. The manner in which the contact wall 411 distributes the game balls will be described with reference to FIG.

In the projecting state, the flow-down prevention plate 412 narrows the size of the opening inside the second branch guiding flow path R2 and the third branch guiding flow path R3 to be equal to or smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and stops the game ball. On the other hand, in the retracted state, the downflow prevention plate 412 is sunk outside the second branch guiding flow path R2 and the third branch guiding flow path R3, so that the game ball is no longer held.

That is, by keeping the downflow prevention plate 412 in an extended state, the game ball that has flowed down the first branch guiding flow path R1 and has reached the left side of the contact wall 411 can be temporarily stopped, and thereafter. By switching the driving state of the stay solenoid 413 and setting the downflow prevention plate 412 in the retracted state, it is possible to send the game ball to the left. Therefore, the timing of sending the game ball downward from the vicinity of the contact wall 411 can be arbitrarily defined depending on the control of the stay solenoid 413.

26A to 26C are partial front views of the second downflow device 400 in the range XXV of FIG. Note that, in FIGS. 26A to 26C, a state in which two game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first specific region 410 is illustrated in a time series, and in FIG. 26A, first. The state immediately before the entered game ball B1 contacts the contact wall 411 is illustrated, and in FIG. 26(b), the game ball B2 entered afterwards comes into contact with the game ball B1 and is pushed to the right. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 26(c), the game balls B1 and B2 are separated, the game ball B1 flows into the second branch guiding flow path R2, and the game ball B2 flows into the third branch guiding flow path R3. Is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 26A to 26C, the downflow prevention plate 412 is illustrated in an extended state.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the previous game ball B1 flows down the first branch guiding flow path R1 toward the lower right along the extending direction, and collides with the contact wall 411 on the right side surface. After landing on the bottom plate of the second branch guiding flow path R2 together with the second branch guiding flow path R2, the second branch guiding flow path R2 flows down to the left.

At this time, the game ball B1 starts flowing down from the state in which the speed in the left-right direction is suppressed (the state of landing) to the second branch guiding flow path R2 to the left. Then, at the position where the contact wall 411 bounces to the left (see FIG. 26B), the flow-down prevention plate 412 blocks the flow-down and stays for a while.

While the game ball B1 stays, the subsequent game ball B2 flows into the first branch region 410, so that the game ball B2 contacts the game ball B1 before contacting the contact wall 411. At the time of this contact, the game ball B1 is arranged at a position slightly deviated to the left from the position of contacting the contact wall 411, and the game ball B2 hits the game ball B1 from above and on the right side of the center of the game ball B1. Contact. Therefore, a rightward load is applied to the game ball B2 from the game ball B1 by the contact.

Further, since the game ball B2 has a velocity component in the lower right direction along the extending direction of the first branch guide flow path R1, it moves to the right after it comes into contact with the game ball B1. Here, since the extension height of the contact wall 411 is made shorter than the diameter of the game balls B1 and B2, the game ball B2 can be moved to the right in a state of getting over the contact wall 411. As a result, the game ball B2 flows down through the third branch guiding flow path R3, is blocked from flowing down by the flow-down blocking plate 412 below the game ball B1, and stays for a while.

The stay solenoid 413 is a period necessary for the game ball B1 and B2 to flow into the first branch guide flow path R1 and before the game ball B2 reaches the downflow prevention plate 412 of the third branch guide flow path R3 (book). When a sufficiently long period (5 seconds in this embodiment) longer than 3 seconds in the embodiment, the drive state is switched to the retracted state. Therefore, even if the intervals at which the two game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first branch guiding flow path R1 are different, the flow-down start timing when the game balls B1 and B2 once stop and then flow down again Also, the flow start position can be fixed.

When two game balls B1 and B2 collectively enter the first branch region 410, the subsequent game ball B2 enters the third branch guide flow channel R3 which is more advantageous than the second branch guide flow channel R2. be able to. On the other hand, when the game balls enter the first branch region 410 one by one, no matter how many times the balls enter, the contact walls 411 block the game balls to the third branch guiding flow path R3. Inflow is prevented.

Therefore, the way of branching the game balls can be changed depending on the number of game balls that collectively enter the first branch region 410, and when two game balls collectively enter the first branch region 410. Both of them can be prevented from flowing into the second branch guiding flow path R2.

Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12 to 20, when two game balls enter the first downflow device 300 as a pre-stage where the game balls flow into the first branch area 410, two game balls. Are sent to the special route hole 323 at substantially the same timing, and flow down to the fixed area hole 340 (see FIG. 5), so the situation in which two game balls collectively enter the first branch area 410 is: If two game balls collectively enter the one downflow device 300, the situation is likely to occur.

27A is a partial top view of the second downflow device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIa in FIG. 24, and FIG. 27B is a second downflow device 400 along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27A. FIG. 27A and 27B, a region corresponding to the second branch region 420 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b), the second branch region 420 is arranged at a position where the game ball that has passed through the second branch guiding flow path R2 comes into contact, and performs a certain reciprocating swing motion. The distribution operation device 421, the special area hole 422 through which the game balls distributed to the front side (lower side in FIG. 27A) by the distribution operation device 421 pass, and the distribution operation device 421 to the rear side (FIG. 27(a) upper side) the first delay preparation hole 423 through which the game balls distributed are passed, and the prevention wall portion 424 that prevents the game balls distributed by the distribution operation device 421 from going to the opposite side. Prepare mainly.

The distribution operation device 421 includes a movable plate 421a that is rotatably supported near the exit position of the first branch guide flow path R2, and a driving force that drives the movable plate 421a, and a flange of the second downflow device 400. And a drive motor 421b fixed to a portion (not shown).

The movable plate 421a is provided with a rotary shaft that extends in the vertical direction at a position that is in contact with the right side of the prevention wall portion 424 and that has a tolerance with the central axis of the second branch guiding flow path R2, and the extending direction of the movable plate 421a is the second branch guiding path. With reference to the state along the central axis of the flow path R2 (state shown by the solid line in FIG. 27A), the front and rear (upper and lower directions in FIG. 27A) are swung by a predetermined angle (45° in the present embodiment). To rotate back and forth. Note that the rotation operation is an operation that continues from when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (other than when there is a power outage such as power off) to when the power is shut off, and it makes one reciprocation every 2 seconds (one-way 90° rotation). The speed mode is about 1 second).

In the present embodiment, the movable plate 421a is located between the pair of reference straight lines L1 with the pair of reference straight lines L1 connecting the rotation axis of the movable plate 421a and the front and rear side wall ends of the second branch guiding flow path R2 as boundaries. The state in which the movable plate 421a is arranged is referred to as the staying state of the movable plate 421a, and the state in which the movable plate 421a is arranged outside the pair of reference straight lines L1 includes the state in which the pair of reference straight lines L1 and the longitudinal direction of the movable plate 421a match. This is referred to as the passage permitting state of the movable plate 421a.

The special area hole 422 guides the passing game ball to the special guide flow path R4. Therefore, the game ball whose direction is changed to the front side (lower side in FIG. 27(a)) by the movable plate 421a falls vertically downward while flowing from the special guidance flow channel R4 to the third branch guidance flow channel R3, It flows into the third branch region 430.

On the other hand, the special area hole 423 guides the game ball that has passed to the second delay guiding flow path R6. Therefore, the game ball whose direction is changed to the inner side (upper side in FIG. 27A) by the movable plate 421a passes through the second delay guiding flow path R6 and passes through the third specific region hole 443.

FIG. 28 is a partial front view of the second downflow device 400 in the range XXVIII in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 28, a region corresponding to the third branch region 430 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 28, the third branch region 430 is a region in which the game balls that have passed through the third branch guiding flow channel R3 enter from above, and the third branch region 430 is the third from the exit position of the third branch guiding flow channel R3. The distribution protrusion 431 is provided so as to project vertically upward at a position where the central axis of the branch guiding flow path R3 is extended.

The distribution protrusion 431 is formed in a mountain shape that is bilaterally symmetrical with respect to a line extending from the central axis of the third branch guiding flow path R3. Therefore, the game sphere that has flowed down the third branch guiding flow path R3 has a center vertically above the center of the distribution protrusion 431 at the start of contact with the distribution protrusion 431. Therefore, the probability of distributing the game balls to the left and right is half and half (50% each).

Next, with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. 39, some modes in which the game balls B1 and B2 pass through the second branch region 420 and the third branch region 430 will be described in different cases. First, a case where the game ball B1a flows down without passing through the second branch region 420 and passes through the special region hole 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31.

29A is a partial front view of the second downflow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 29B is a part of the second downflow device 400 in the direction of arrow XXIXb of FIG. 29A. It is a top view, FIG.30(a) is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG.30(b) is 2nd in the arrow XXXb direction view of FIG.30(a). FIG. 31 is a partial top view of the downflow device 400, and FIGS. 31A and 31B are partial front views of the second downflow device 400 in the range XXVIII in FIG. 24. 29(a), 29(b), 30(a), 30(b), 31(a), and 31(b), the first branch region 410 is grouped into two pieces. The manner in which the game balls B1a and B2a that have sphered flow down is illustrated in a diagram series.

As shown in FIG. 29(a) and FIG. 29(b), when the game ball B1a reaches the second branch area 420, when the movable plate 421a is in the passage-permitted state by opening the special area hole 422 side, The game ball B1a reaches the special area hole 422 and drops into the special area hole 422 without particularly decelerating, as shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b).

Here, the downward flow of the game balls B1a and B2a from the first branch region 410 to the left occurs because the speed in the left direction starts from the first branch region 410, and thus the aspect of the second branch guiding flow path R2 ( By setting the extension length and inclination angle) and the third branch guiding flow path R3 (extension length and inclination angle), it is possible to aim at the positions of the game balls B1a and B2a flowing down.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31A, when the game ball B1a falls into the special area hole 422 without being decelerated to the movable plate 421a in the second branch area 420, the third branch guiding flow path R3 is formed. The flow path shape is designed so as to drop on the upper surface of the passing game ball B2a.

For example, a game ball flows down from the second branch guiding flow path R2 to the special area hole 422 in 2 seconds and drops from the special guiding flow path R4 to the third branch area 430 in 1 second, while the third branch guiding flow. The game ball is configured to flow down the road R3 in about 2.5 seconds.

Here, when the game ball B2a moves from the state shown in FIG. 30(a) to the state shown in FIG. 31(a), the game ball B2a collides with the left side wall of the third branch guiding flow path R3 to the left. The velocity of is killed and it falls freely downward vertically. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 31(a), the horizontal speed and the vertical speed of the game ball B2a are greatly reduced. By the mode in which the game ball B1a is dropped toward the position where the speed is greatly reduced, the game ball B1a and the game ball B2a can be stably brought into contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 31A, from the state where the game balls B1a and B2a are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, the game balls B1a and B2a are continuously connected and dropped vertically downward, and then the lower game ball B2a is distributed. Collide with 431. In that case, the proportion of the game ball B2a distributed to the distribution projections 431 is 50% on the left and right, but when the game ball B2a is distributed to either the left or right, it collides with the game ball B1a on it. By doing so, the game ball B1a is easily distributed to the left and right opposite sides of the game ball B2a. Therefore, the two game balls B1a and B2a can be easily made to flow down one by one in both directions of the distribution protrusion 431.

In the present embodiment, after the game balls B1a and B2a are distributed by the distribution protrusions 431, the second specific area switch 442a is compared with the period required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area switch 441a. The time it takes for a game ball to pass through is significantly increased.

Therefore, by letting each of the two game balls B1a, B2a flow down in both directions of the distribution protrusion 431, the game balls B1a, B2a before the game balls B1a, B2a pass the second specific area switch 442a. B2a can be passed through the first specific area switch 441a. Thereby, as compared with the case where one game ball flows into the third branch region 430, the probability that the player wins the 16 round jackpot (the jackpot whose profit is larger than the 7 round jackpot) can be improved.

A case where the game ball B1b temporarily stays in the second branch area 420 and then passes through the special area hole 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35.

32(a) is a partial front view of the second downflow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 32(b) is a part of the second downflow device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32(a). 33A is a top view, FIG. 33A is a partial front view of the second downflow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 33B is a second view in the direction of the arrow XXXIIIb of FIG. 33A. 34A is a partial top view of the downflow device 400, FIG. 34A is a partial front view of the second downflow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 34B is an arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34A. It is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus 400 in direction view, and FIG. 35 is a partial front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG.

32(a), 32(b), 33(a), 33(b), 34(a), 34(b) and 35, the first branch region 410 is collected. The manner in which the two game balls B1b and B2b entering the ball flow down is illustrated in a diagram series.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), when the game ball B1b reaches the second branch area 420, the movable plate 421a stays in the middle of rotating toward the first delay preparation hole 423. In the case of, the game ball B1b is hindered from advancing at the tip of the movable plate 421a, and temporarily (for about 1 second) at the position shown in FIG. After the stagnation, the movable plate 421a further rotates and enters the passage-permitted state, and flows down toward the special region hole 422 (see FIG. 33B). Here, since the game ball B2b continues to flow down while the game ball B1b stays, the game ball B1b reaches the special area hole 422 with a deviation from the timing at which the game balls B1b and B2b come into contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), at the timing when the game ball B1b starts to flow into the special guidance flow path R4, the game ball B2b has already reached the distribution protrusion 431, and the distribution in the third branch region 430 has been executed. There is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 35, the game ball B1b reaches the distribution protrusion 431. Here, when the game balls B1b and B2b are distributed by the distribution protrusions 431, the game balls B1b and B2b do not interfere with each other, so the distribution ratio for each of the game balls B1b and B2b is 50%. ..

That is, since the player has two chances of flowing the game balls B1b and B2b into the first special area hole 441, when only one game ball enters the second downflow device 400. By comparison, it is possible to make it easier for the player to improve the profits obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the first delay flow path R5 is arranged between the distribution protrusion 431 and the second specific region hole 442, so that the game ball B2b that has reached the distribution protrusion 431 first. Even if the game ball B2b is distributed to the second specific region hole 442 side while the game ball B2b is flowing down the first delay guiding flow path R5 (about 2 seconds), the subsequent game ball B1b is the first specific region. After passing through the hole 441 (after 1 second from the state shown in FIG. 34A, that is, while the gaming ball B2b is flowing down the first delay guiding flow path R5), the first specific area switch 441a A state of being detected (a state in which the player has won a 16 round jackpot) can be configured. This makes it easier for the player to improve the profits obtained.

A case where the game ball B1c passes through the first delay preparation hole 423 without staying in the second branch region 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39.

36(a) is a partial front view of the second downflow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 36(b) is a part of the second downflow device 400 in the direction of the arrow XXXVIb of FIG. 36(a). FIG. 37A is a top view, FIG. 37A is a partial front view of the second downflow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 37B is a second view in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37A. FIG. 38 is a partial top view of the downflow device 400, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are partial front views of the second downflow device 400.

In addition, in FIG. 36(a), FIG. 36(b), FIG. 37(a), FIG. 37(b), FIG. 38, and FIG. 39, the two game balls B1c, which are collected in the first branch area 410, are entered. The flow of B2c is illustrated in a diagram series.

As shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b), when the game ball B1c reaches the second branch region 420, the movable plate 421a opens the first delay preparation hole 423 side and is in the passage permitting state. In this case, the game ball B1c reaches the first delay preparation hole 423 and drops into the first delay preparation hole 423 as shown in FIGS. 37(a) and 37(b) without any particular deceleration.

The game ball B1c that has fallen into the first delay preparation hole 423 flows down the second delay guide flow path R6 toward the third specific region hole 441. Here, as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, the game ball B2c that has flowed down the third branch guiding flow path R3 is distributed to the left and right by the distribution protrusion 431, but the distance to the specific region is the first side. The period (about 2 seconds) during which the game ball B2c flows down the delay induction flow path R5 is shortened compared to the period (about 5 seconds) during which the game ball B1c flows down the second delay induction flow path R6. ..

That is, regardless of whether the game ball B2c is distributed to the right or left by the distribution protrusion 431, before the game ball B1c flows down the second delay guiding flow path R6 and passes through the third specific region switch 443a, The game ball B2c can be caused to flow into the first specific area switch 441a or the second specific area switch 442a. This makes it easier for the player to improve the profits obtained.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the two game balls are collectively entered into the first downflow device 300, so that the game balls can be easily entered into the fixed area hole 340. The inclined portion 330 is provided, and the player can easily obtain the profit by playing a game in which the two game balls are put together in the movable ball winning combination device 190.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter the movable ball inputting device device 190, and both of them enter the fixed area hole 340, the second flow-down device 400 that follows is one piece. It has a structure that makes it easier to win big jackpots with greater profits compared to the case where the game balls of No. 1 flow down. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, a second downflow device 2400 in the second embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the second delay guiding flow path R6 is configured as a long and gently sloping flow path to gain a period until the gaming ball passes through the third specific area switch 443a. The second flow-down device 2400 according to the second embodiment is projected for a predetermined period of time when the game ball enters each of the start winning holes 26 to 28 (see FIG. 2), and causes the game ball to fall into the specific area hole 2440. A time blocking plate 2411 for blocking is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

40(a) is a front view of the second downflow device 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIGS. 40(b) and 40(c) show the second downflow line along the line XLb-XLb in FIG. 40(a). FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of device 2400. Note that in FIG. 40A, the illustration of the lid member arranged on the front side is omitted, and the inner surface of the specific region hole 2440 is shown, which is the same in FIGS. 41 and 42. Further, FIG. 40(b) shows a state in which the time limit blocking plate 2411 is projected, and FIG. 40(c) shows a state in which the time period blocking plate 2411 is retracted.

As shown in FIG. 40A, the second downflow device 2400 includes a first branch guiding flow path R1, a time branch area 2410 connected to the first branch guiding flow path R1, and a time limit of the time branch area 2410. An electromagnetic solenoid 2420 that changes the state of the blocking plate 2411 is mainly provided.

The timed branch region 2410 is a region that sends the game ball that has flowed down the first branch guide flow path R1 to one of the specific regions, and a specific region hole 2440 that is an entrance into which the game ball flows into the specific region. A time limit blocking plate 2411 for temporarily preventing the ball from passing and a number of (three in this embodiment) specific area holes 2440 through which game balls are fed are provided.

The time limit blocking plate 2411 is in a projecting state in which it projects inside the specific region hole 2440 (projects downward in FIG. 40B) and when it sinks outside the specific region hole (projects upward in FIG. 40B). The immersive state can be configured by the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 2420, and the upper surface of the plate in the projecting state is arranged at a position depressed from the entrance (upper surface) of each specific area hole 2440 by the radius of the game ball. ..

The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is energized when the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a (see FIG. 5) to form an extended state. The overhang state is longer than the period (up to 10 seconds in the present embodiment) required for the game ball to pass through the first branch guide flow path R1 and be arranged inside each specific region hole 2440. It is maintained for a sufficiently long period (12 seconds). As a result, it is possible to align the falling timing of the game balls falling from the specific area holes 2440.

Each specific area hole 2440 is a hole that is large enough to allow one game ball to pass through, and the first specific area hole 2441 in which the game balls that have flowed down to the first branch guide flow path R1 drop with equal probability. And a second specific region hole 2442 and a third specific region hole 2443.

The 1st specific area hole 2441 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the 1st specific area for 16 round big hits, and the 1st specific area switch 2441a is arrange|positioned just under it. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 2441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

The 2nd specific area hole 2442 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the 2nd specific area for 7 round big hits, and the 2nd specific area switch 2442a is arrange|positioned just under it. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second specific area hole 2442 and passing through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a.

The third specific area hole 2443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for three-round jackpot, and the third specific area switch 2443a is arranged directly below the hole. Thereby, the game ball passing through the third specific area hole 2443 and passing through the third specific area is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 40A, the distances H1 to H3 from the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 to the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 2442 to the second specific area switch 2442a is increased as compared with the distance (distance H1) from the first specific area hole 2441 to the first specific area switch 2441a, The distance (distance H3) from the third specific area hole 2443 to the third specific area switch 2443a is made longer (distance than the distance from the second specific area hole 2442 to the second specific area switch 2442a (distance H2). H1<distance H2<distance H3). Since the flow-down resistances of the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 are configured to be the same, the profit that the player can obtain when a plurality of game balls fall into the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 in a manner in which the fall timings are aligned. Can be the maximum benefit in the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 through which the game balls pass. In the present embodiment, the flow resistance is made equal, but the flow resistance may be changed so that the distances H1 to H3 are made equal, so that the present effect may be obtained.

An example of the flow-down mode of the game balls B10 and B11 when two game balls B10 and B11 collectively flow into the second flow-down device 2400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

41(a), 41(b) and 42 are front views of the second flow-down device 2400. 41(a), 41(b) and 42, a state in which the two game balls B10, B11 that have entered the third flow-down device 2400 flow down is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), when the previous game ball B10 enters the third specific region hole 2443 with equal probability, the game ball B10 becomes a lid, and the subsequent game ball B11 is the third specific region. It becomes impossible to enter the hole 2443. Thereby, when two game balls enter the second downflow device 2440, it is possible to prevent the two game balls from entering the same specific area hole 2440 (for example, the third specific area hole 2443). You can

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the subsequent game ball B11 enters the second specific area hole 2442 or the first specific area hole 2441 with equal probability. Note that FIG. 41B illustrates a case where the game ball B11 enters the first specific area hole 2441.

As shown in FIG. 42, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is de-energized and the time blocking plate 2411 is put in the retracted state, the game balls B10 and B11 drop at the same time. At this time, since the distance H1 is shorter than the distance H3, the game ball B11 passes through the third specific area switch 2443a after the game ball B11 passes through the first specific area switch 2441a and is detected. Therefore, it is invalid that the game ball B10 has passed the third specific area switch 2443a, and the player can win the 16 round jackpot.

Thereby, in the present embodiment, when two game balls B10, B11 are entered into the second flow-down device 2440, it is possible to prevent both of them from entering the same specific area holes 2441 to 2443. It is possible to adopt a mode in which the game balls entered in the specific region holes 2441 to 2443, which are more advantageous to the player, are effectively detected by the respective specific region switches 2441a to 2443a. Thereby, as compared with the case where one game ball flows into the second flow-down device 2400, the player can obtain a jackpot with a higher profit.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52, the first downflow device 3300 in the third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path of the game ball changes due to the contact of the game ball with the distribution body 322 has been described, but the route distribution unit 3320 of the first flow-down device 3300 in the third embodiment is By colliding the game balls with each other, the flow path of the game balls is changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

43 is a front view of the first downflow device 3300 in the third embodiment, FIG. 44 is a side view of the first downflow device 3300 in the direction of arrow XLIV in FIG. 43, and FIG. It is a top view of the 1st flow-down apparatus 3300 in the arrow XLV direction view. Note that, in FIG. 43, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the front side wall of the introduction passage 3310 and the front side wall of the root distribution unit 3320 is omitted (that is, the game balls are inside the introduction passage 3310 and the root movement). It flows down the inside of the dividing portion 3320, and is not a mode in which the game ball falls off toward the front side (front side in FIG. 43)).

As shown in FIG. 43 to FIG. 45, the first downflow device 3300 is an introduction passage 3310 that guides the game balls that have entered the special winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) to the root distribution unit 3320, and the introduction passages thereof. A route distribution part 3320 into which a game ball that has passed through 3310 enters, a distribution inclination part 330 having a projection part 331, a fixed region hole 340, and a dislocation hole 350 are mainly provided.

The introduction passage 3310 is a branch region 3311 arranged in the central portion of the front view, and is formed as a descending slope toward the branch region 3311 and is a flow path through which the game ball flows down, and is connected to the branch region 3311. An upper flow path 3312 and a flow path that is formed to descend from the branch area 3311 in both left and right directions when viewed from the front and flows down the game ball, and is connected to the connection flow paths 3314 and 3315 at the left and right ends. The side flow path 3313, the right side connection flow path 3314 extending from the right end portion of the lower flow path 3313 in the direction in which the right flow path 3313 descends downward toward the rear side without a left-right component, and the left end of the lower flow path 3313. From the above portion, the left connecting channel 3315 extending in the direction of descending and inclining toward the front side without the component in the left and right direction, and the upward projecting portions at the left and right inner positions of the lower bottom plates of the respective connecting channel 3314, 3315. And a protruding portion 3316 that is formed.

The branch region 3311 includes a partition wall portion 3311a that is a wall portion that allows the game ball sent from the upper flow path 3312 to flow into the lower flow path 3313 on the same left and right sides in a state where the game ball is not accommodated.

The partition wall portion 3311a is a position separated from the position where the bottom plate of the upper flow path 3312 is interrupted by one game ball (one game ball in the left-right direction), and extends the bottom plate of the lower flow path 3313 in the left-right direction. It is a wall portion that extends upward from the installed position at a height equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball.

The function of the partition wall portion 3311a will be described with reference to FIG. 46A and 46B are partial front views of the introduction passage 3310. 46(a) and 46(b), the flow-down state of the game balls B20, B21 when the game balls B20, B21 collectively enter from one entrance of the introduction passage 3310 is shown in time series. To be done.

When the game ball enters the introduction passage 3310 from the right side, the game ball enters the branch region 3311 from the upper flow path 3312 and drops vertically, and the partition wall portion 3311a is restricted from moving leftward, and continuously flows downward. Enter the road 3313.

That is, if the number of game balls flowing down the introduction passage 3310 is one, or even if there are two, the left and right ones are divided, the game ball flowing down the upper flow path 3312 from one of the left and right sides is a branch region 3311. Then, the ball is thrown into the lower flow path 3313 in a manner of being bounced back to the same side. The introduction passage 3310 has a symmetrical shape, and this is the same even when the game ball enters from the left side.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46(a), when the two game balls B20 and B21 collectively flow down the introduction passage 3310 from the right side, the previous game balls B20 enter the branch region 3311 from the upper flow path 3312. In the state of falling in the vertical direction, the rear game ball B21 can get over the previous game ball B20 before turning left and right. Since the protrusion 3316 has a height equal to or smaller than the diameter of the game ball, in this case, the game ball B21 rides over the protrusion 3316 and enters the lower flow path 3313 on the left side of the protrusion 3316.

Therefore, when two game balls enter the introduction passage 3310 in a group, whether they enter the introduction passage 3310 one by one from the left and right sides, or two balls from one left and right sides, enter the introduction passage 3310. It is possible to enter the game balls into the route allocating unit 3320 in a manner of one left and one right.

It returns to FIG. 43 to FIG. 45 and demonstrates. The game sphere that has passed through the lower flow path 3313 falls downward along the extension direction of the connection flow paths 3314 and 3315 (the direction in which there is no left-right direction component). Each of the connection channels 3314 and 3315 is configured such that the lower bottom plate (the lower plate in FIG. 43) is inclined downward toward the center. Therefore, when the game ball sent from the lower flow path 3313 to the connection flow paths 3314, 3315 lands on the lower bottom plate of the connection flow paths 3314, 3315, there is almost no horizontal velocity, and the lower bottom plate Rolls toward the center of the left and right according to the inclination.

After that, the game ball comes into contact with the projecting portion 3316, is decelerated, and then flows into the root distributing portion 3320. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball entering the route distributing unit 3320 from jumping out in the left-right direction, and to roll the game ball along the shape of the inner surface of the route distributing unit 3320. Since the extending directions of the connection flow paths 3314 and 3315 are different in the front-rear direction, the front-rear position of the game ball entering the route distributing unit 3320 is slightly shifted.

Next, the route allocating unit 3320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. 43 to 45 will be appropriately referred to in the description of the route distribution unit 3320. 47A is a partial cross-sectional view of the first downflow device 3300 taken along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 43, and FIG. 47B is a first downflow device 3300 taken along line XLVIIb-XLVIIb in FIG. 47A. FIG. 48 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first downflow device 3300 taken along the line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. 47( b ).

The route distribution unit 3320 includes a pair of guide rails 3321 that guide the rolling of the game balls that have entered from the introduction passage 3310, and a region in which the game balls can move at the center of the guide rails 3321 in the front-rear direction (Fig. 47(a) vertical direction), an enlarged region 3322, a hole 3323 for a special route configured as a hole through which a game ball can fall at a center position in the front-rear direction of the enlarged region 3322, and an end portion of each guide rail 3321. In the normal route hole 3324 configured as a hole in which the game ball can be dropped, and the game ball that has passed through the normal route hole 3324 is made to flow backward toward the rear end portion of the distribution inclination part 330. A route taxiway 3326 is mainly provided.

The guide rail 3321 bends downward in a front view in which the game ball is supported by two rails arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction and the flow path is regulated. Since the pair of guide rails 3321 are rotationally symmetrical with respect to the center of the left and right in a top view, the guide rail 3321 that guides the game ball flowing in from the left side will be described, and the guide rail 3321 on the opposite side will be described. Is omitted.

The guide rail 3321 includes a central rail portion 3321a extending along the curved shape of the bottom plate (bottom plate in FIG. 43) of the route distributing portion 3320 near the center position in the front-rear direction of the route distributing portion 3320, and its center. And an auxiliary rail portion 3321b provided in parallel with the rail portion 3321a.

The central rail portion 3321a and the auxiliary rail portion 3321b have the same overhanging height in the cross-sectional shape (overhanging height toward the bending center side). The formation of the center rail portion 3321a is omitted in the left-right center portion corresponding to the special route hole 3323. In addition, the formation of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b is omitted from the position displaced to the left and right outwards from the portion where the central rail portion 3321a is omitted, and the end portion of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b (the root distribution portion 3320). A normal route hole 3324 is formed downward at a position at which the horizontal velocity of the game ball that has entered the ball and has not collided with another game ball disappears). The central rail portion 3321a is also used as the pair of guide rails 3321.

The enlarged region 3322 is provided with a special route hole 3323 in a lower portion (a rear portion in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 47(a)) of a central position in the front-rear direction (upward/downward direction of FIG. 47(a)). An inclined surface 3322a arranged at the front and rear position of the hole 3323 and a curved receiving wall 3322b arranged as a wall portion convexly curved in the front and rear direction of the inclined surface 3322a are provided.

The inclined surface 3322a is connected to the center-side end of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b (the end portion in the portion where formation is omitted), and also has a downward convex curved shape with the end portion of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b as an end point (see FIG. 48), and a curved side wall 3322a1. The inclined surface 3322a is configured in such a manner that the inclined side surface 3322a1 is gently inclined upward as it approaches the curved receiving wall 3322b.

The hole for special route 3323 is a hole for dropping the game ball in the vicinity of the center position on the left and right of the front end of the distribution inclination part 330 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the probability that a game ball that has dropped through the special route hole 3323 will enter the fixed area hole 340 as compared with a game ball that has dropped through the normal route hole 3324.

The normal route hole 3324 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the normal route guideway 3326 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the game ball that has fallen through the normal route hole 3324 passes through the normal route guideway 3326 and falls near the rear end portion of the distribution inclination part 330 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the probability that a game ball that has dropped through the normal route hole 3324 will enter the fixed area hole 340 is lower than that of a game ball that has dropped through the special route hole 3323.

With reference to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the flow-down mode of the game ball B22 when one game ball B22 flows into the route distributing unit 3320 will be described. 49(a), 49(b), 50(a), and 50(b) are cross-sectional views of the root distribution unit 3320 taken along the line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 43. In addition, in FIG. 49(a), FIG. 49(b), FIG. 50(a), and FIG. 50(b), the flow-down aspect of the game ball B22 flowing down the route distribution unit 3320 is illustrated in chronological order. It

As shown in FIG. 49(a), the game ball B22, which has been decelerated by flowing down the left connecting flow path 3315 and contacting the protruding portion 3316, is supported by the guide rail 3321 and rolls in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 49(b), when the game ball B22 approaches the enlarged region 3322, the state where the auxiliary rail portion 3321b supports the game ball B22 shifts to the state where the curved side wall 3322a1 supports.

In this state, the curved side wall 3322a1 is lower than the central rail portion 3321a, so that the center of gravity of the game ball B22 moves toward the inclined surface 3322a (the game ball B22 leans on the inclined surface 3322a).

As shown in FIG. 50A, the game ball B22 passes above the special route hole 3323 while leaning on the inclined surface 3322a. In this state, the velocity of the game ball B22 in the left-right direction is high, so it is unlikely that the game ball B22 will drop into the hole 3323 for the special route, but the fall of the game ball B22 is surely brought closer to the inclined surface 3322a side. It is possible to prevent the game ball B22 from colliding with the opening end of the special route hole 3323 and decelerating.

As shown in FIG. 50(b), the game ball B22 passing above the special route hole 3323 reaches the right end normal route hole 3323 and falls. Therefore, when one game ball B22 enters the route distributing unit 3320, the game ball B22 is preferentially entered into the normal route hole 3324. Therefore, whether or not the game ball B22 passes through the fixed area hole 340 (see FIG. 45) depends on the randomness when colliding with the protrusion 331 of the distribution inclination part 330 and randomly flowing down and flowing down. To be

Next, with reference to FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the flow-down mode of the game balls B23, B24 when the two game balls B23, B24 flow into the route distributing unit 3320 will be described. 51(a), 51(b), 52(a) and 52(b) are cross-sectional views of the root distribution unit 3320 taken along the line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 43. In addition, in FIG. 51(a), FIG. 51(b), FIG. 52(a) and FIG. 52(b), the flow-down mode of the game balls B23 and B24 flowing down the route distribution unit 3320 is in chronological order. Illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51A, the game balls B23 and B24 which are decelerated by flowing down the right side connecting flow path 3314 and the left side connecting flow path 3315 and contacting the protruding portion 3316 are supported by the guide rail 3321 and left and right. Roll in the direction.

Here, since the pair of guide rails 3321 also serve (shared) the central rail portion 3321a, as shown in FIG. 51(b), when the game balls B23, B24 flow into the expansion region 3322, the game balls B23, B24. Collide.

Since the game balls B23 and B24 flow down while being displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51(a)), the collision causes a speed in the front-rear direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 52A, the game balls B23 and B24 flow down in the direction of approaching the curved side wall 3322a1 and collide with the curved side wall 3322a1.

Since the curved side wall 3322a1 is formed in a curved shape that is convex in the front-rear direction, it gives a load in the direction of pushing back the game balls B23, B24 in the left-right direction, whereby the game balls B23, B24 have a speed in the left-right direction. be killed.

Therefore, neither of the game balls B23 and B24 can reach the normal route hole 3324, and as shown in FIG. 52(b), the expanded region 3322 rolls steadily, and after the speed becomes small, the special It drops into the root hole 3323.

Therefore, when two game balls B23 and B24 enter the route distribution unit 3320, the game balls B23 and B24 are preferentially entered into the special route hole 3323. Therefore, the probability that the game balls B23 and B24 pass through the fixed area hole 340 (see FIG. 45) for both balls is dramatically improved.

That is, when the two game balls B23 and B24 enter the route allocating unit 3320, the game balls are more responsive than when one game ball B22 enters the route allocating unit 3320. The probability of passing through the fixed area hole 340 can be dramatically improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter, the game balls collide with each other in the route distribution unit 3320 of the first downflow device 3300, so that the game balls have a special route hole 3323. It is possible to improve the probability of flowing into.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53 to FIG. 55, the first flow-down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the game ball comes into contact with the distribution body 322, and the flow path of the game ball changes depending on whether the distribution body 322 is balanced or not depending on how the weight of the game ball is applied has been described. The route distribution unit 4320 of the first downflow device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is configured in a mode that changes the route after the game balls are ejected, depending on how many game balls are retained to the left of the injection solenoid 4323. It The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

53(a) and 53(b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. Note that FIG. 53A shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is retracted, and FIG. 53B shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is energized and protrudes.

As shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), the first flow-down device 4300 has an introduction passage 310 (the first protruding portion 311 is omitted) and a game ball sent from the introduction passage 310. A route distribution unit 4320 for distribution, a distribution inclination unit 330, a fixed region hole 340, and a deviation hole 350 (see FIG. 5) are mainly provided.

The route distribution unit 4320 is a route distribution unit guiding path 4321 that guides a game ball that has entered into a drop hole 4321a and a stay that is extended downward in the right direction vertically below the drop hole 4321a. A flow path 4322, and an injection solenoid 4323 fixed to the first flow-down device 4300 so that the movable part can be pulled inward of the retention flow path 4322 along the extending direction of the retention flow path 4322. , A special route hole 4324 for letting the game ball flow down to the special route guideway 325 (left side guideway 325a) and a normal route hole for letting the game ball flow down to the normal route guideway 326 (see FIG. 5). 4325 is mainly provided.

The retention channel 4322 is formed such that the distance from the position where the game ball falling through the drop hole 4321a lands to the injection solenoid 4323 in the retracted state is longer than one game ball. As a result, when two game balls B31 and B32 (see FIG. 55(a)) enter the first flow-down device 4300, the retention passage 4322 on the left side of the injection solenoid 4323 receives the retention passage. Two game balls B31 and B32 can be arranged along the extending direction of 4322.

The injection solenoid 4323 operates upon the passage of the game ball to the start winning holes 26, 27, 28 (see FIG. 2). That is, the game balls that have entered the large winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) that is opened when the game balls have passed through the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28 reach the retention channel 4322. For a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds according to the present embodiment), the retracted state is maintained, and then the state is vigorously changed to the protruding state (the movable portion is extended). As a result, the game ball is ejected toward the left side of the stay channel 4322.

54(a) and 54(b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300. In addition, in FIG. 54A, a state in which the game ball B30 reaches the retention flow path 4322 while the injection solenoid 4323 is retracted is illustrated, and in FIG. 54B, the injection solenoid 4323 is energized to move the movable portion. The state in which the bulge is projected is shown.

As shown in FIG. 54A, when one game ball B30 is entered in the first downflow device 4300, one game ball B30 reaches the left side of the injection solenoid 4323 (the injection solenoid). One game ball B30 leans against 4323).

In this state, when the injection solenoid 4323 changes to the projecting state, the game ball B30 suddenly pops out toward the normal route hole 4325, and the game ball B30 falls into the normal route hole 4325 (the game ball B30 for the normal route). The injection solenoid 4323 is projected in such a manner that the initial speed of reaching the hole 4325 is adjusted.

Since the game ball dropped in the normal route hole 4325 is guided to the normal route guideway 326 (see FIG. 5), when one game ball B30 enters the first downflow device 4300, as described above. In addition, whether the game ball B30 enters the fixed area hole 340 (see FIG. 5) or not depends on the randomness when the game ball B30 flows down the distribution inclination part 330 (see FIG. 5). On the other hand, when two game balls are inserted into the first flow-down device 4300, the situation changes.

55(a) and 55(b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300. Note that FIG. 55(a) shows a state in which the two game balls B31 and B32 have reached the retention channel 4322 while the injection solenoid 4323 is retracted. In FIG. 55(b), the injection solenoid 4323 is shown. The state in which the movable part is projected by being energized in the figure is shown.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when two game balls B31 and B32 are inserted into the first flow-down device 4300, the injection solenoid 4323 on the left side of the injection solenoid 4323 in the retracted state. Two game balls B31 and B32 are arranged along the projecting direction (along the extending direction of the stay channel 4322).

When the two game balls B31 and B32 are arranged side by side and the injection solenoid 4323 is extended as shown in FIG. 55(b), the object to be pushed out is a game compared to the case where there is one game ball. Since the two balls are heavy, the game balls B31 and B32 do not reach the normal route hole 4325, and the two game balls B31 and B32 fall into the special route hole 4324 in front of them.

Since the game ball that has fallen into the special route hole 4324 is guided to the special route guideway 325, when two game balls B31 and B32 enter the first downflow device 4300, as described above, it is confirmed. A situation in which the game balls B31 and B32 are likely to enter the area hole 340 (see FIG. 5) is formed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of game balls entering the first flow-down device 4300 is different, the distance by which the electric operating device (injection solenoid 4323) that operates to move the game balls moves the game balls. By making the (flying distance) different, it is possible to make the flowing path of the game ball different thereafter.

According to this, as in the case where the two game balls are brought into contact with the movable member (for example, the distribution body 322 (see FIG. 5) in the second embodiment) from both sides in the moving direction to bring the movable member into a balanced state. Since it is not necessary to divide the two game balls into the left and right sides of the distribution body 322, simplify the structure of the route distribution part guideway 4321 (structure a hole of a size through which only one game ball passes). You can

Moreover, since the operation and the accuracy of the injection solenoid 4323 are high, there may occur a malfunction such as entering the special route hole 4324 even though only one game ball is in the stay channel 4322. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, the second downflow device 5400 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the contact wall 411 is configured as a fixed portion, and when two game balls enter the first branch area 410, one game ball enters the third branch guiding flow path R3. Although the case where the ball is thrown has been described, the first branch region 5410 of the second downflow device 5400 in the fifth embodiment includes the operation wall 5411 that continuously operates at a constant interval after the power is turned on. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

56 is a partial front view of the second downflow device 5400 in the fifth embodiment in a range corresponding to the range XXV in FIG. As shown in FIG. 56, the first branch region 5410 of the second downflow device 5400 is provided with a rotating shaft in the bottom plate portion of the second branch guiding flow path R2, and a section L that reciprocates in rotation at predetermined intervals after the power is turned on. A motion wall 5411 having a V shape is provided.

The operation wall 5411 is an inclined state (shown by a solid line in FIG. 56) that guides the game ball that has arrived from above to the right by the electric operation of a drive motor (not shown), and the contact wall 411 in the first embodiment. At a position similar to (see FIG. 24), a reciprocating motion is performed at predetermined intervals between a vertical state in which the wall portion extends vertically upward (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 56).

Therefore, in the vertical state, the flow-down mode of the game balls when two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 is the same as that described in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to configure a case where two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 in the inclined state. Hereinafter, the flow-down mode will be described.

57(a) to 57(c) are partial front views of the second downflow device 5400 in a range corresponding to the range XXV in FIG. 57(a) to 57(c), the inclined state of the operation wall 5411 is illustrated, and the flow-down mode of the two game balls B40 and B41 flowing into the first branch region 5410 is illustrated in time series. It

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) to 57(c), the operating wall 5411 is inclined so that the gap between the extended tip and the second branch guiding flow path R2 is equal to or smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The position and sectional shape of the rotation axis are determined. Therefore, in the inclined state, the two game balls B40 and B41 are both guided to the third branch guiding flow path R3.

Therefore, the two game balls B40, B41 can be reliably guided to the third branch area 430 (see FIG. 31), and the two distribution balls B40, B41 are distributed to the left and right by the distribution protrusion 431. Since it can be facilitated, the game ball B40 or the game ball B41 can be easily dropped into the first specific area hole 441. This makes it possible for the player to easily obtain the 16-round jackpot obtained by the game ball passing through the first specific area switch 441a (see FIG. 31), so that two moving walls 5411 are provided when the operating wall 5411 is inclined. At the time when the game balls B40 and B41 of No. 1 enter the first branch area, the player can watch the downflow of the game ball with peace of mind.

On the other hand, if the two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 when the operation wall 5411 is in the vertical state, as described above in the first embodiment, the game balls are branched one by one in the second branch guide flow path. This is a flow-down mode in which the flow is divided into R2 and the third branch guiding flow path R3 and flows down (see FIG. 26), which is a slightly disadvantageous flow-down mode compared to when the operating wall 5411 is in the inclined state. The game ball flowing down R2 is not stopped on the movable plate 421a (see FIG. 27), and the game ball flowing down the second branch guiding flow path R2 passes through the special guiding flow path R4, so that the game ball It joins the third branch guiding flow path R3 (see FIGS. 29 to 31). That is, as in the case where the two game balls B40 and B41 enter the first branch area 5410 when the operation wall 5411 is in the inclined state, the two distribution balls B40 and B41 are moved to the left and right by the distribution protrusion 431. Since it is possible to easily sort the individual balls, it is possible to easily drop the game ball B40 or the game ball B41 into the first specific area hole 441. As a result, the player can easily obtain the 16 round jackpot obtained by the game ball passing through the first specific area switch 441a (see FIG. 31).

Thereby, depending on the state of the operating member (moving wall 5411, movable plate 421a (see FIG. 27)), the location where the flow-down mode of the game ball is different is the first branch area 5410 and the second branch area 420 (see FIG. 24). It can be configured in multiple locations. When two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 when the movable wall 5411 is in an inclined state, the player can watch the subsequent flow of the game ball with peace of mind. On the other hand, when two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 when the movable wall 5411 is in the vertical state, the player pays attention to the flowing down mode of the game ball in the second branch area 420 thereafter. It will be.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the flowing game ball, increase the variation of the flowing game ball, and provide a fresh game.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the operating wall 5411 maintains the inclined state is made shorter than the period during which the operating wall 5411 maintains the vertical state, which prevents the player from becoming too advantageous. There is. That is, in the present embodiment, the operating wall 5411 maintains the vertical state for the first period (for example, 4 seconds), and then maintains the tilted state for the second period (for example, 1 second), and then the vertical state is maintained. The state change is repeated from the time the power is turned on in such a manner that it is maintained only for the first period. That is, when the game ball enters the first branch area, the probability that the operation wall 5411 is in the inclined state can be set to a predetermined ratio (20%), and the two game balls B40 and B41 are 2 It is possible to reduce the probability of occurrence of a situation in which the individual pieces are guided to the third branch guiding flow path R3.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 82, a second downflow device 6400 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, when a plurality of game balls flow into the timed branch region 2410 and fall into the specific region hole 2440, there is a difference between the profit that can be expected from the game ball that drops first and the profit that can be expected from the game ball that falls later. The second flow-down device 6400 in the sixth embodiment is provided with the profit increasing device 6450 that makes the profit that can be expected from the game ball that drops later than the profit that can be expected from the game ball that drops first. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

58 is a front view of the second downflow device 6400 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 59(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, and FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59( a ). In FIG. 58, the lid member disposed on the front side is omitted and the inner surface of the specific region hole 6440 is partially illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 58, 59(a) and 59(b), the second downflow device 6400 includes a first branch guiding flow path R1 and a timed branch region connected to the first branch guiding flow path R1. 6410, a specific area hole 6440 in which the game ball flowing down the timed branch area 6410 falls, and a profit increasing device 6450 which operates by the game ball dropped in the specific area hole 6440 (falls and bounces are settled), and a game. It mainly comprises a slide delay device 6460 operated by the game ball in the process of falling the ball into the specific area hole 6440, and a restriction device 6470 for partitioning the inside of the timed branch area 6410 by the operation and restricting the flow path of the game ball.

The timed branch region 6410 is a region that sends the game ball that has flowed down the first branch guide flow path R1 to one of the specific regions, and flows down toward the specific region hole 6440 by rolling the game ball on the upper surface. A plate-like rolling plate 6412 that is configured to be possible, a time-blocking plate 2411 that temporarily prevents a game ball from passing through a specific region hole 6440 that is an entrance into which the game ball flows into a specific region, and its time limit. An electromagnetic solenoid 2420 that changes the state of the blocking plate 2411. Note that, unlike the second embodiment, the time blocking plate 2411 is obliquely arranged according to the shape of the specific region hole 6440.

The rolling plate 6412 includes a recessed portion 6412a recessed rearward in a shape including the movement locus of the movement blocking surface 6451d of the profit increasing device 6450 in a top view, and the front side (front side in FIG. 58). The slide delay device 6460 is installed in a posture in which the slide delay device 6460 is installed on the upper surface of the slide delay device 6460.

The specific area holes 6440 mainly include a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) specific area holes, that is, a first specific area hole 6441, a second specific area hole 6442, and a third specific area hole 6443, and each specific area hole 6440 is provided. The area holes 6441 to 6443 are formed in a shape that operatively accommodates the profit increasing device 6450 at the entrance opening 6440i that receives the game ball.

In the present embodiment, the profit increasing device 6450 is configured as a device that rotates about the rotation axis extending to the left and right, so that the profit increasing device 6450 does not interfere with the rotation of the profit increasing device 6450 when the profit increasing device 6450 rotates. The wall portion that configures the specific area hole 6440 is disposed on one side.

The specific area hole 6440 is a hole having a size such that one game ball can pass through, and when a single game ball flows down to the first branch guide flow path R1, the game ball has an equal probability. It mainly includes a first specific area hole 6441 that drops, a second specific area hole 6442, and a third specific area hole 6443.

The first specific area hole 6441 is a hole for guiding the game sphere to the first specific area for 16 round jackpot, and the upper and lower flow paths extending vertically from the inlet opening, and the game sphere at the lower end of the flow path. And a first specific area switch 2441a is disposed inside the diagonal flow path. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 6441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

In addition, above the first specific area switch 2441a, the time-blocking plate 2411 is extended in an extended state (see FIG. 60), and in that extended state, the game ball is prevented from flowing down the first specific area hole 6441. ..

The 2nd specific area hole 6442 and the 3rd specific area hole 6443 have the same internal shape as the 1st specific area hole 6441, and the 2nd specific area hole 6442 puts a game ball in the 2nd specific area for 7 round jackpot. It is a hole for guiding, and the third specific area hole 6443 is different in that it is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for three round jackpot.

That is, the second specific area switch 2442a is arranged inside the oblique flow path of the second specific area hole 6442, and the third specific area switch 2443a is arranged inside the oblique flow path of the third specific area hole 6443. ..

Thereby, the game ball passing through the second specific region hole 6442 and passing through the second specific region is detected by the second specific region switch 2442a, passes through the third specific region hole 6443, and passes through the third specific region. The game sphere to be played is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 60, the distances H1 to H3 from the specific area holes 6441 to 6443 to the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, as compared with the distance (distance H1) from the inlet of the oblique flow path of the first specific area hole 6441 to the first specific area switch 2441a, the second specific area switch from the inlet of the oblique flow path of the second specific area hole 6442. The distance to the 2442a (distance H2) is made longer, and the distance to the second specific area hole 6442 from the inlet of the oblique flow path to the second specific area switch 2442a (distance H2) is larger than that of the third specific area hole 6443. The distance (distance H3) from the inlet of the flow path to the third specific area switch 2443a is lengthened (distance H1<distance H2<distance H3).

As a result, when the game balls fall from the entrances of the oblique flow paths of the specific area holes 6441 to 6443 at the same timing, the shorter specific area switches 2441a to 2443a of the distances H1 to H3 are effectively detected. Players can win jackpots with more rounds.

The slide delay device 6460 is a member that is operably arranged below the rolling plate 6412 and projects to the inside of the second specific region hole 6442 and the inside of the third special region hole 6443, and below the rolling plate 6412. A long plate-shaped rotating plate 6461 that rotates around an axis fixed in the above, and one end of the rotating plate 6461 in the longitudinal direction (right side of FIG. 59(a)) are connected and slide in the front-back direction. A right side slide plate 6462R that is operably supported, a left side slide plate 6462L that is connected at the other end of the rotary plate 6461 in the longitudinal direction and that is slidably supported in the front-rear direction, and these slide plates 6462R, Biasing springs 6463R and 6463L for biasing 6462L forward are mainly provided.

In the state shown in FIG. 59(a) (the state where the load due to the external force is not generated), the slide delay device 6460 is in the balanced state. In this balance state, the right slide plate 6462R and the left slide plate 6462L have substantially the same inward protrusion amount of the specific region holes 6442 and 6443.

From this equilibrium state, when the game ball begins to drop into the specific area holes 6442 and 6443, a load is applied to the right slide plate 6462R or the left slide plate 6462L from the game ball and the slide plates 6462R and 6462L slide and move in the front-rear direction. To do. At this time, since the slide plates 6462R and 6462L are connected to both ends of the rotary plate 6461, the slide plates 6462R and 6462L move in the opposite directions. That is, when one slide plate (for example, the right slide plate 6462R) slides backward, the other slide plate (for example, the left slide plate 6462L) slides forward.

The slide plates 6462R and 6462L have the same length in the lengthwise direction, but have different tip shapes. That is, the right slide plate 6462R is formed in a shape in which the tip is inclined downward toward the front side, and the left slide plate 6462L is formed in a shape in which the tip is flat (extends horizontally).

Therefore, for example, when a game ball flows into the second specific region hole 6442 and the third specific region hole 6443 at the same time, the left slide plate 6462L preferentially slides backward (the right slide plate 6462R projects forward). Therefore, the fall of the game ball into the third specific area hole 6443 is delayed. The action and effect in that case will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

The biasing springs 6463R and 6463L are formed of the same spring member and have a natural length in the balanced state. In the present embodiment, the elastic springs (loose springs) in which the respective slide plates 6462R and 6462L have a period of 1 second or more from the retracted state to the balanced state due to the action of the game ball are urging springs 6463R. , 6463L.

The profit increasing device 6450 mainly includes a first rotating member 6451 arranged inside the first specific region hole 6441 and a second rotating member 6452 arranged inside the second specific region hole 6442. .. Next, the detailed configuration of the profit increasing device 6450 will be described.

FIG. 60 is a sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along line LX-LX in FIG. As shown in FIG. 60, the first rotating member 6451 has a main body member 6451a formed in a substantially columnar shape with the width dimension in the axial direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 60) being substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and its main body. A recessed portion 6451b that is recessed in a substantially fan shape in the approximately 1/4 circumference of the member 6451a, a transmission portion 6451c that is formed by projecting along the circumferential surface in the diagonally upper front portion of the main body member 6451a, and the transmission portion thereof. A main body member 6451a is provided with a movable closing surface 6451d formed on the left side of the 6451c (backward direction in FIG. 60) to extend in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the game ball is recessed in the standby state shown in FIG. By being accommodated in the portion 6451b, it is configured in a mode (center of gravity balance) in which the game ball moves backward to the transmission state (see FIG. 65) due to its weight.

The main body member 6451a is formed such that the center of the circle forming the outer periphery and the rotation axis coincide with each other, and the center of gravity G1 of the first rotation member 6451 is provided in the lower portion on the front side of the rotation axis in the standby state shown in FIG. As a result, when the main body member 6451a leans forward in the standby state, the main body member 6451a is supported under the lid member provided on the front side, so that the posture is stabilized in the standby state shown in FIG.

The recessed portion 6451b includes upper and lower side surfaces VS1 extending in the up-down direction (vertical direction) and front-rear side surfaces HS1 extending in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction) in the standby state shown in FIG.

The upper and lower side surfaces VS1 are arranged above the rotation shaft of the first rotating member 6451, and the distance V1 between the side surface on the back side of the third specific area hole 6443 is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. To be done.

Thereby, when the game ball starts to drop into the third specific area hole 6443, the weight of the game ball can be used to apply a load to the right slide plate 6462R via the game ball. In addition, after the game ball is housed in the recessed portion 6451b and the first rotation member 6451 starts the backward rotation operation, the distance between the upper and lower side surfaces VS1 and the side surface on the rear surface side of the third specific region hole 6443 is the distance. By narrowing than V1 (that is, smaller than the diameter of the game ball), another game ball newly falls into the third specific area hole 6443, or the game ball already accommodated in the recessed portion 6451b bounces back. Can be prevented.

The transmission portion 6451c is provided with a circular arc side surface RS that is recessed in the shape of an arcuate cross section near the rear end and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed so as to be inclined downward.

The radius of curvature of the arc side surface RS1 is equal to the radius of curvature of the game ball. Thereby, when the game ball is arranged on the arc side RS1, the game ball can be supported at multiple points, and the effect of the arc side RS1 guiding the game ball can be improved.

The movement blocking surface 6451d is formed below a straight line extending along the surface on which the circular arc side surface RS1 is formed (the side surface at the upper end of FIG. 66). As a result, in the transmission state (see FIG. 65), the movement blocking surface 6451d is disposed below the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412 on which the game ball rolls, so that the game ball and the movement blocking surface 6451d in the transmission state. It is possible to prevent the contact.

Further, the movement blocking surface 6451d is in a mode in which the gap between the restriction device 6470 and the size of the game ball is equal to or smaller than the size of the game ball when the restriction device 6470 is in the post-operation state in the standby state of the first rotation member 6451. Composed.

In addition, in the standby state, the front surface of the moving closing surface 6451d contacts the rear surface of the transmission portion 6452c of the second rotating member 6452 (see FIG. 59B).

61 is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LXI-LXI in FIG. 59(a). As shown in FIG. 61, the second rotating member 6452 has the same cross-sectional shape as the first rotating member 6451 except that there is no portion corresponding to the moving closing surface 6451d. That is, the second rotation member 6452 has a main body member 6452a formed in a substantially columnar shape with the width dimension in the axial direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 61) being substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and the main body member 6452a being substantially 1 61 mainly includes a recessed portion 6452b that is recessed in a substantially fan shape in the /4 circumference portion, and a transmission portion 6452c that is formed by projecting along the circumferential surface in the diagonally upper front portion of the main body member 6452a. By storing the game ball in the recessed portion 6452b in the standby state shown, the game ball is configured to rotate backward until the transmission state (see FIG. 66) due to the weight of the game ball (center of gravity balance).

Similar to the main body member 6451a of the first rotating member 6451, the main body member 6452a is formed such that the center of the circle forming the outer periphery coincides with the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G2 of the second rotating member 6452 is shown in FIG. In the standby state, it is provided on the lower part on the front side of the rotary shaft. When the main body member 6452a leans forward in the standby state, the posture is stabilized in the standby state shown in FIG. 61 by being supported by the lid member arranged on the front side.

The recessed portion 6452b includes upper and lower side surfaces VS2 and front and rear side surfaces HS2, similarly to the recessed portion 6451b of the first rotating member 6451.

The upper and lower side surfaces VS2 are arranged above the rotating shaft of the second rotating member 6452, and the distance V2 between the side surface on the back side of the second specific area hole 6442 is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. To be done.

Thus, when the game ball starts to fall into the second specific area hole 6442, the weight of the game ball can be used to apply a load to the left slide plate 6462L via the game ball. In addition, after the game ball is housed in the recessed portion 6452b and the second rotation member 6452 starts to move backward, the distance between the upper and lower side surfaces VS and the side surface on the back surface side of the second specific area hole 6442 is the distance. By narrowing than V2 (that is, smaller than the diameter of the game ball), another game ball newly falls into the second specific area hole 6442, or the game ball already accommodated in the recessed portion 6452b bounces back. Can be prevented.

Similar to the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotation member 6451, the transmission portion 6452c is provided with a circular arc side surface RS2 that is recessed in a circular arc cross section near the rear end and extends in the left-right direction, and the circular arc side surface RS2 is leftward. As it goes toward (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 61), it is formed so as to be inclined downward in the transmission state.

Further, the transmission portion 6452c is configured such that the right end portion interferes with the movement blocking surface 6451d in the movement locus (see FIG. 59(b)). Therefore, when the second rotating member 6452 moves backward, the transmitting portion 6452c pushes the moving closing surface 6451d, and the first rotating member 6452 also moves backward (FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 64). (See (b)).

The radius of curvature of the arc side surface RS2 is equal to the radius of curvature of the game ball. Thereby, when the game ball is arranged on the arc side RS2, the game ball can be supported at multiple points, and the effect of the arc side RS2 guiding the game ball can be improved.

Next, the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62(a), 62(b) and 63. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, and FIG. 62B is a second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LXIIb-LXIIb in FIG. 62A. FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 62(a), 62(b) and 63 show the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451, and FIG. 63 shows the game ball housed in the recessed portion 6451b.

As shown in FIGS. 62(a), 62(b) and 63, in the transmission state of the first rotation member 6451 after the first rotation member 6451 is moved backward by the weight of the game ball, the transmission portion 6451c The rear end is brought into contact with the side surface of the inlet opening 6440i on the back side to stop the rotation in the rearward rotation direction (the side surface of the inlet opening 6440i on the back side functions as a whirl stop). Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state, the game ball remains on the upper surface of the time blocking plate 2411, and in this state, the game ball and the front and rear side surfaces HS1 hit the rotating direction of the first rotating member 6451. Since they are in contact with each other, the first rotating member 6451 is prevented from performing the forward rotation operation. This stabilizes the posture of the first rotating member 6451 in the transmitted state.

Note that the game ball on the time-blocking plate 2411 is maintained on the time-blocking plate 2411 until the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 operates and the game ball falls, so depending on the operation control of the electromagnetic solenoid 2420, the transmission state can be changed. The maintenance period can be controlled.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state of the first rotation member 6451, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific area hole 6443 is blocked by the transmission portion 6451c, and the other game balls are the third specific area hole 6443. It can be prevented from falling.

Since the transmission portion 6451c is arranged below the front end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 63) of the rolling plate 6412 in the transmission state, the rolling portion 6412 rolls to move the third specific region hole 6443. The game ball reaching the entrance opening portion 6440i can be smoothly placed on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6451c.

As described above, the transmission portion 6451c is configured so as to descend and incline toward the left side (the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 63) in the transmission state, so that the game ball riding on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6451c flows down to the left. be able to. For example, in the state of FIG. 62(a), when the game ball rides on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6451c, the game ball is directed to the second specific area hole 6442 along the inclination of the transmission unit 6451c (FIG. 62(a) ) Can be rolled to the left).

Therefore, the transmission portion 6451c has the effect of preventing a plurality of game balls from flowing down to the third specific area hole 6443, and the flow direction of the game ball flowing down toward the third specific area hole 6443. Can be switched in the downward direction toward the second specific region hole 6442 (or the first specific region hole 6441), which has a higher expected benefit than the third specific region hole 6443.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451, since the moving closing surface 6451d sneaks under the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412, the game ball does not contact the moving closing surface 6451d, The game ball can freely move in the left-right direction above the recessed portion 6412a.

From the state shown in FIG. 63, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is activated and the time blocking plate 2411 is in the retracted state (the state in which it is pulled out to the outside of the third specific basin hole 6443), the game ball falls and the first rotation member 6451 moves. Since the load that stops the forward rotation operation is released, the first rotation member 6451 performs the forward rotation operation and returns to the standby state (see FIG. 60).

Next, the transmission state of the second rotating member 6451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. 64A is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, and FIG. 64B is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64A. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view, FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LXV-LXV in FIG. 64(a), and FIG. 66 is a second downflow device taken along the line LXVI-LXVI in FIG. 64(a). 6400 is a cross-sectional view of 6400. FIG. 64 to 66, the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452 is illustrated, and in FIG. 65, the game ball housed in the recessed portion 6452b is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 64 to FIG. 66, in the transmission state after the second rotating member 6452 moves backward due to the weight of the game ball, the rear end portion of the transmission portion 6452c contacts the side surface on the back side of the inlet opening 6440i. By making contact with each other, the rotation in the rearward rotation direction is stopped (the side surface on the back side of the inlet opening 6440i functions as a rotation stop). Further, as shown in FIG. 65, in the transmission state, the game ball is kept on the upper surface of the time blocking plate 2411, and in this state, the game ball and the front and rear side surfaces HS2 are in contact with each other in the rotation direction of the second rotating member 6452. Since they are in contact with each other, the second rotating member 6452 is prevented from rotating forward. This stabilizes the posture of the second rotation member 6452 in the transmitted state.

As shown in FIG. 66, the first rotating member 6451 also moves backward based on the second rotating member 6452 moving backward. Here, the game ball is not accommodated in the recessed portion 6451b of the first rotating member 6451, but the rear end portion of the transmission portion 6452c of the second rotating member 6452 is in front of the moving closing surface 6451d of the first rotating member 6451. Abutting from (see FIG. 64(b)), the first rotating member 6451 also moves backward based on the backward rotating operation of the second rotating member 6452, and the forward rotating operation of the first rotating member 6451 is prevented. It Therefore, based on the second rotation member 6452 being in the transmission state, the first rotation member 6451 is similarly in the transmission state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the transmission state of the second rotation member 6452, the entrance opening 6440i of the second specific area hole 6442 is blocked by the transmission portion 6452c, and the other game balls are the second identification. It can be prevented from falling into the area hole 6442. In addition, since the first rotation member 6451 is also in the transmission state, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific area hole 6443 is blocked by the transmission portion 6451c, and another game ball falls into the third specific area hole 6443. Can be prevented.

Since the transmission portion 6452c is disposed below the front end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 65) of the rolling plate 6412 in the transmission state of the second rotating member 6452, the rolling portion 6412 rolls to the first position. The game ball that reaches the entrance opening portion 6440i of the 2 specific area hole 6442 can be smoothly placed on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6452c.

As described above, the transmission portion 6452c is configured to be inclined downward toward the left (in the direction of the paper surface of FIG. 65) in the transmission state, so that the game ball riding on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6452c flows down to the left. be able to. For example, in the state of FIG. 65, when the game ball rides on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6452c, the game ball is directed toward the first specific area hole 6441 along the inclination of the transmission unit 6452c (FIG. 64(a) left side). Can be rolled.

Therefore, the transmitting portion 6452c has the effect of preventing a plurality of game balls from flowing down to the second specific area hole 6442, and the flow-down direction of the game ball flowing down toward the second specific area hole 6442. Can be switched to the downward direction toward the first specific region hole 6441, which can be expected to have a higher profit than the second specific region hole 6442.

Furthermore, since the 1st rotation member 6451 will also be in a transmission state when the 2nd rotation member 6452 is a transmission state, the transmission part 6452c has flowed down toward the 3rd specific area hole 6443 with the smallest expected profit. There is an effect that the flow-down direction of the game ball can be switched to the flow-down direction toward the first specific region hole 6441 with the largest expected profit. As a result, the player can experience the effect of great reversal, and the player's interest can be improved.

From the state shown in FIG. 64 to FIG. 66, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 operates and the time blocking plate 2411 enters the retracted state (the state in which it is pulled outside the second specific basin hole 6442), the game ball falls and the second rotation. Since the load for stopping the forward rotation operation of the member 6452 is released, the second rotation member 6452 performs the forward rotation operation, and accordingly, the first rotation member 6451 also performs the forward rotation operation and returns to the standby state (see FIG. 60).

Next, an operation inside the second downflow device 6400 when two game balls reach the timed branch region 6410 and respectively head toward the second specific region hole 6442 and the third specific region hole 6443 will be described. ..

67 is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 67, and FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 67.

70 and 72 are cross-sectional views of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 67, and FIGS. 71 and 73 are cross-sections of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 67. It is a figure. 67 to 69, two game balls B61 and B62 which flow down the timed branch region 6410 and reach the front specific region hole 6440 with a time difference t1 (t1=1 second) are illustrated, and FIG. 71 and FIG. 71, the state in which the game ball B61 pushes in the left slide plate 6462L is shown, and in FIG. 72 and FIG. 73, the transmission state between the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452 of the profit increasing device 6450 is shown. To be done.

In the present embodiment, 0.1 seconds elapse from when the game ball B61 starts contacting the left slide plate 6462L (see FIG. 68) until the left slide plate 6462L is fully pushed, and from there, the second rotation member 6452. Is set in a state in which 0.4 seconds elapses before becoming a transmission state. That is, based on FIGS. 67 to 69 (elapsed time t=0), FIGS. 70 and 71 show the state of the timing of t=0.1 seconds, and FIGS. , T=0.5 seconds is illustrated.

68 and 69, a state in which the game ball B62 flows down on the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412 and the game ball B61 starts to contact the tip portion of the left slide plate 6462L is illustrated.

From this state, when the game ball B61 begins to drop into the second specific area hole 6442, the left slide plate 6462L is pushed to the outside of the second specific area hole 6442 by the game ball B61 as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71. Based on this, the right side slide plate 6462R is projected to the inside of the third specific region hole 6443.

In this case, by narrowing the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific area hole 6443, the game ball B62 stays outside the entrance opening 6440i (above the right slide plate 6462R). In the present embodiment, after each slide plate 6462R, 6462L is moved, it is configured such that one second elapses from the time the load is released to the time when the slide ball 6462R and 6462L return to the balanced state. The right slide plate 6462R maintains the projecting state even after further dropping from the state shown.

From the state shown in FIG. 70, the game ball B61 further falls, and after a lapse of time, the second rotating member 6452 performs the backward rotation operation and enters the transmission state (see FIG. 72). The state shown in FIG. 72 is a state where the elapsed time t=0.5 seconds, and in this state the right side slide plate 6462R is maintained in a protruding state, so that the game ball B62 is still in the entrance opening 6440i. It is located outside.

Then, in the process of the backward rotation operation until the second rotation member 6452 (and the first rotation member 6451) is in the transmission state, the game ball B62 abuts on the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotation member 6451 and is pushed up. The game ball B62 is arranged on the upper surface of the transmission portion 64514c.

After that, the game ball B62 flows down toward the first specific area hole 6441 along the slope of the upper surfaces of the rolling portions 6451c and 6452c. That is, according to the present embodiment, by the action of the game ball B61, the flow-down path of the game ball B62 that has flowed down along the path that is likely to flow into the third specific area hole 6443 (hole with the smallest expected profit) until immediately before. , The first specific area hole 6441 (hole having the largest expected profit) can be switched to the downflow path. As a result, the player can feel a great reversal, and the interest of the player can be improved.

74 to 80, a case where two game balls B63 and B64 start to drop into the second specific area hole 6462 and the third specific area hole 6463 at the same time will be described.

74 is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LXXV-LXXV in FIG. 74, and FIG. FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 74.

77 and 79 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 taken along the line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. 74, and FIGS. 78 and 80 are cross-sections of the second flow-down device 6400 taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 74. It is a figure.

74 to 76, two game balls B63 and B64 which flow down the timed branch region 6410 and reach the front specific region hole 6440 with a time difference t1 (t1=0 seconds, that is, simultaneously) are shown. 77 and 78, the state in which the game ball B63 pushes the left side slide plate 6462L is illustrated, and in FIGS. 79 and 80, the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452 of the profit increasing device 6450. The transmission state is shown.

When FIGS. 74 to 76 are used as reference (elapsed time t=0), FIGS. 77 and 78 show the state of the timing of t=0.1 seconds, and FIGS. 79 and 80 show , T=0.5 seconds is illustrated.

In FIG. 75, the state where the game ball B63 is starting to contact the tip of the left slide plate 6462L is shown. Because of the difference in the tip shapes of the slide plates 6462L and 6462R, in this state (the state where the elapsed time t=0), the game ball B64 arranged at the same height as the game ball B63 is different from the right slide plate 6462R. Not in contact (see FIG. 76).

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the left side slide plate 6462L is pushed outward of the second specific area hole 6442 based on the further fall of the game ball B63 from the state shown in FIG. 74, and the right side slide plate 6462R. Are projected inward of the third specific area hole 6443.

In this case, by narrowing the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific area hole 6443, the game ball B64 stays outside the entrance opening 6440i (above the right slide plate 6462R). In the present embodiment, after each slide plate 6462R, 6462L is moved, it is configured such that one second elapses from the release of the load to the return to the balanced state, so the game ball B63 is shown in FIG. 77. The right slide plate 6462R maintains the projecting state even after further dropping from the state shown.

Here, in the process of dropping the game ball B64, the game ball B64 also comes into contact with the tip of the right slide plate 6462R, but the left slide plate 6462L and the game ball B63 first come into contact with each other and start sliding, so that the right slide. Since the tip portion of the plate 6462R goes under the game ball B64, the component of the load applied from the game ball B64 to the right slide plate 6462R is larger in the direction perpendicular to the slide movement direction than in the slide movement direction. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B64 from interfering with the operation of the right slide plate 6462R overhanging.

From the state shown in FIG. 77, the game ball B63 further falls, and after a lapse of time, the second rotation member 6452 performs a backward rotation operation and enters a transmission state (see FIG. 79). The state shown in FIG. 79 is a state where the elapsed time t=0.5 seconds, and in this state, the right side slide plate 6462R is maintained in a protruding state, so that the game ball B64 is still in the entrance opening portion 6440i. It is located outside. When the second rotation member 6452 (and the first rotation member 6451) is in the transmission state, the game ball B64 contacts the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotation member 6451 in the process of the backward rotation operation until the transmission state is established. By being pushed up, the game ball B64 is arranged on the upper surface of the transmission portion 64514c.

After that, the game ball B64 flows down toward the first specific region hole 6441 along the inclination of the upper surfaces of the rolling parts 6451c and 6452c. That is, according to the present embodiment, when the two game balls B63 and B64 reach the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443 at the same time, the third specific area hole 6443 (expected profit can be expected until just before). To the first specific area hole 6441 (hole with the largest expected profit) due to the action of the game ball B63. You can switch. As a result, it is possible to create an opportunity for a game ball that flows down a route that has not been noticed in the past to be noticed, and it is possible to effectively use the corresponding space of the pachinko machine 10 as a production space. Since the player can get a sense of great reversal, the player's interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the tip portion of the right slide plate 6462R is formed by the inclined surface, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tip of the left slide plate 6462R may be formed as an inclined surface and the tip of the right slide plate 6462L may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this case, when the game balls B63 and B64 simultaneously drop into the second specific region hole 6442 and the third specific region hole 6443, the game ball B63 that is about to fall into the second specific region hole 6442 is transmitted to the second rotation member 6452. It will be pushed out to the upper surface of the portion 6452c, and the game ball B63 moves toward the first specific area hole 6441. In this case, the distance over which the upper surface of the game ball B63 transmission portion 6452c rolls can be shortened compared to the present embodiment, so that the game ball B63 can reach the first specific area hole 6441 early and the big hit. Can be shortened.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to move the game ball B64 toward the third specific area hole 6443 toward the first specific area hole 6441, a structure in which the tip end of the right side slide plate 6463R is intentionally inclined is adopted. ing. With the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to change at once from a situation in which the minimum profit can be obtained from the game ball B64 to a situation in which the maximum profit can be obtained by the flow of the game ball B64. As a result, it is possible to instill in the player a feeling that the game ball B64 heading for the third specific area 6443 cannot be ignored, and to improve the attention of the route heading for the third specific area 6443 which is usually neglected. Therefore, it is possible to focus on the entire timed branch region 6410 of the second downflow device 6400.

That is, in the case where either the right slide plate 6462R or the left slide plate 6462L is formed with an inclined surface, when two game balls flow into the timed branch region 6410 at short intervals, at least one of the game balls Will pass through the first special area switch 2441a, which has the largest profit to be given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to maximize the profit to be finally given while maintaining the effect that the profit to be given to the player in the subsequent game sphere is increased, so that the interest of the player is improved. It is possible to exert both an effect (an effect that does not make you tired and agitation) and an effect that maximizes a substantial profit (the number of balls played).

81 and 82 are cross-sectional views of the second downflow device 6400 taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58. 81 and 82, two game balls B65 and B66 flowing down the inside of the second flow-down device 6400 are shown in chronological order, and a state after the operation of the limiting device 6470 is shown. ..

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the limiting device 6470 has a rotation shaft at the rear end of the timed branch region 6410, and directs the game balls B65 and B66 to the third specific region hole 6443 in the state after the operation. A partition rod 6471 is provided to allow it to flow down.

The partition rod 6471 is arranged in such a manner as to come into contact with the game ball at the height of the center position of the games B65 and B66 rolling on the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B65 and B66 that are in contact with the partition rod 6471 from moving over the partition rod 6471 to the left.

In the state after the operation of the limiting device 6470, the flow-down mode of the game balls B65 and B66 flowing down inside the second flow-down device 6400 will be described.

In FIG. 81, the first rotating member 6451 is in a standby state. In this case, as described above, the size of the gap between the partition rod 6471 of the limiting device 6470 and the moving closing surface 6451d of the first rotating member 6451 is set to be equal to or smaller than the size of the game ball. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the game ball B65 does not go to the left of the partition rod 6471, is retained on the right side of the partition rod 6471, and flows down toward the third specific area hole 6443.

Therefore, in the state after the limiting device 6470 is operated, when a single game ball flows down to the second flow-down device 6400, it is possible to form a state in which the single game ball always drops into the third specific area hole 6443. As a result, for example, in a jackpot state in which a single game ball enters the second downflow device 6400, the jackpot rate is improved while improving the probability of entering the movable ball entry device device 190 (see FIG. 2) by a time-saving game. By unifying the ball to the ball (minimum ball) obtained by dropping the game ball into the third specific area hole 6443, it is easy to continue the time saving game, but the one big jackpot A suppressed gaming machine can be configured. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the player's intention of wanting to continue playing for a long time after a big hit, although there is no need to have a lot of balls.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball dropped through the third specific area hole 6443 passes through the time saving switch 190d, the jackpot is won during the time saving game so that the time saving game is promised again. Becomes As a result, the player can continue to enjoy the big hit game and the time saving game while suppressing the consumption of the game balls.

On the other hand, when two or more game balls flow down to the second flow-down device 6400 in the state after the limiting device 6470 is operated, the first game ball B65 rotates the first rotation member 6451 as shown in FIG. 82. By doing so, the second game ball B66 rolls toward the second specific region hole 6442 or the first specific region hole 6441 on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotation member 6451. That is, in the state after the limiting device 6470 has been operated, by allowing a plurality of game balls to enter the second downflow device 6400, it is possible to obtain a large number of exit balls in the jackpot game. There is a real benefit in putting in multiple game balls. This makes it easier for the player to play a game in which the shooting intensity of the game balls is adjusted in order to enter a plurality of game balls into the movable ball winning accessory device 190.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when two game balls are collectively entered into the second downflow device 6400, the profit increasing device 6450 operates to obtain the specific area hole 6440 into which the previous game ball has flown. With respect to the profit that can be obtained, the profit that can be obtained by the specific area hole 6440 into which the later game balls have flown can be forcibly increased. As a result, the flow path of the subsequent game ball can be changed by the action of the previous game ball, so that attention to the movement of the game ball can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the subsequent game sphere does not have a smaller profit than the previous game sphere, so that which specific region hole 6440 the later game sphere flows into can be seen with more peace of mind than usual. be able to.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first game ball that has flown into the second downflow device 6400 can be configured to surely flow down to the third specific area hole 6443, so while suppressing the exit ball, combine it with another action. (In the present embodiment, by combining with the acquisition of time saving), the range of playability can be expanded.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 101, a second downflow device 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the game ball flows down by its own weight and is distributed to each of the specific area holes 441 to 443 has been described, but the second flow-down device 7440 in the seventh embodiment provides the driving force for moving the game ball. A game ball driving device 7450 for generating is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of a second downflow device 7400 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of a rolling bed device 7410. In addition, in FIG. 83, a game ball that flows down the first branch guide flow path R1 and starts to flow into the game ball driving device 7450 is illustrated. 84 corresponds to a state in which the game ball drive device 7450 and the like are removed from FIG. 83.

As shown in FIG. 83 and FIG. 84, the second downflow device 7400 rolls the rolling bed device 7410 and the rolling bed device 7410 which are extended in the left-right direction while passing the game ball on the upper surface side. A pair of ring-shaped rotary distribution devices 7420 formed of a translucent resin material while distributing game balls, a drive device 7430 for generating a rotational driving force of the rotary distribution device 7420, and a rolling bed device 7410. A plurality of specific area holes 7440 through which the game balls distributed to the rotation distribution device 7420 can flow down, and the rotation shaft is arranged in a manner that the axial direction is along the extending direction of the rolling bed device 7410. The game ball driving device 7450 is mainly provided.

The rolling bed device 7410 includes a first branch guiding flow path R1, left and right support columns 7411L and 7411R that rotatably support the rotation distribution device 7420, and a tilting floor 7412 that is tiltable by the weight of the game ball. And, the inclined passage 7413 which descends and inclines to the left where the game ball that has passed the left support column 7411L to the left rolls, a pair of support holes 7414 that support the game ball drive device 7450, and the drive of the drive device 7430. A motor support hole 7415 for supporting the motor 7431, a sensor for detecting a game ball immediately before flowing into the screw member 7453 from the first branch guide flow path R1, and an inflow sensor 7416 arranged below the support hole 7414, Mainly equipped with.

The left support pillar 7411L is configured in a T-shaped pillar shape, and includes a main pillar 7411a extending in the vertical direction, and a branch pillar 7411b extending in the front-rear direction in a longitudinally symmetrical shape at the upper end portion of the main pillar 7411a. And a collar 7411c formed of a rotatable ring-shaped member protruding from the upper surface of the branch post 7411b.

The main pillar 7411a is arranged on the side facing the second specific area hole 7442 formed in the vertical direction and the tilting floor 7412, and supports the tilting floor 7412 so that the tilting floor 7412 can tilt in the vertical direction. The bearing portion 7411a1 is mainly provided.

An upper surface of the branch post 7411b is recessed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the rotary distribution device 7420, and the rotary distribution device 7420 is rotatably supported (fitted) in the recessed portion. A plurality of collars 7411c are arranged near the front and rear ends of the branch post 7411b, and the amount of protrusion from the upper surface of the branch post toward the rotation axis of the rotary distribution device 7420 is constant. As a result, the rotation distribution device 7420 can rotate while being in contact with the plurality of collars 7411c, and it is possible to prevent the rotation distribution device 7420 from being rubbed against the branch posts 7411b and worn. The durability can be improved.

The right supporting column 7411R is provided with a third specific region hole 7443 instead of the second specific region hole 7442, and is provided with a projecting member 7411h that projects to the inside of the hole by the operation of the tilting floor 7412. Has a configuration similar to that of the left support column 7411L, and a description thereof will be omitted.

The inclined floor 7412 is supported by the bearing portion 7411a1, and the state can be changed between an upward state in which the game ball is not riding and a downward state in which the game ball is tilted by riding, and the upper surface is a game ball driving device 7450. It is recessed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the. The distance between the recessed portion of the upper surface and the cylindrical portion 7453a of the game ball driving device 7450 is arranged to be longer than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can roll in the recessed portion of the upper surface while swinging in the front-rear direction (circumferential direction of the arc).

The inclined flow path 7413 is an inclined flow path that guides the game ball that has reached the left side of the left support pillar 7411L to the first specific area hole 7441, and the side support pillar in which the first specific area hole 7441 is formed. 7413a.

In the present embodiment, the side support columns 7413a and the left and right support columns 7411R and 7411L provided with the specific region holes 7440 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the formation of a structure for blocking the flow of the game ball by the time limit blocking plate 2411 (see FIG. 40). That is, in the present embodiment, the time blocking plate 2411 described in the second embodiment is arranged at a position where the inner diameter of each specific region hole 7440 is narrowed (see FIG. 85(a)). Thereby, in consideration of the difference in the height of each specific area switch 2441a to 2443a of the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter different specific area holes 7440, the benefit given to the player The game ball can be passed through the higher switch first. Therefore, the player can win the jackpot with the higher profit, so that the player can be prevented from being discouraged.

Further, the time limit blocking plate 2411 is arranged at a position where only one game ball can be accommodated in the specific area hole 7440 and the second and subsequent game balls are not accommodated (depth of the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, since only a single game ball is accommodated in the single specific area hole 7440, when two or more game balls flow down to the second downflow device 7400, the player is allowed to move to the second specific area. It is possible to obtain a jackpot of 7 rounds or more that can be obtained by the game ball passing through the switch 2442a.

The rotation distribution device 7420 is a device formed of an annular rotating member fitted on the upper surfaces of the left and right support columns 7411L and 7411R, and is a first circular ring fitted on the upper surface of the left support column 7411L. Mainly includes a member 7421 and a second annular member 7422 fitted on the upper surface of the right support column 7411R.

The first annular member 7421 includes a main body portion 7421a formed in a cylindrical shape, a plurality of opening portions 7421b opened by removing the wall portion in the widthwise central portion of the main body portion 7421a, and the opening portions 7421b. The outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 7421a is recessed toward the center of rotation on the outer side in the width direction than the central portion in the width direction in which is opened, and the outer side in the width direction than the recessed fitting portion 7421c. Mainly includes a gear 7421d formed along the circumference.

The first annular member 7421 alternately arranges the curved surface of the main body portion 7421a and the opening of the opening portion 7421b in the lower portion by the rotation operation of the driving device 7430. Thereby, when the game ball is made to flow down to the second specific region hole 7442 opened in the left support column 7411L (a part of the case where the opening portion 7421b matches the opening of the second specific region hole 7442), the game ball is When passing to the left without flowing down to the second specific area hole 7442 (a part of the case where the opening portion 7421b matches the opening of the second specific area hole 7442 and the main body portion 7421a closes the second specific area hole 7442) If) and can be formed.

The opening portion 7421b is composed of a pair of opening portions opened to a size through which the game ball can pass, and openings formed at 90 degrees around the rotation axis are arranged at 90 degree intervals. That is, every time the first annular member 7421 rotates by 90 degrees, the portion arranged below the rotation shaft is replaced by the main body portion 7421a and the opening portion 7421b. The side surface that surrounds the opening 7421b is formed so as to be inclined so as to face the inner circumferential side (the chamfer of the corner portion on the outer circumferential side). Thereby, the degree of deceleration when the game ball comes into contact with (hangs on) the side surface of the opening 7421b can be reduced.

The recessed fitting portion 7421c is a portion formed according to the arrangement of the collar 7411c of the rolling floor device 7410. Since the first annular member 7421 rotates while the collar 7411c is in contact with the recessed fitting portion 7421c, the collar 7411c is arranged so as to be able to contact the main body portion 7421a in the left-right direction. Therefore, axial displacement of the first annular member 7421 can be suppressed by the collar 7411c and the main body portion 7421a contacting in the left-right direction (rotational axis direction).

The gear 7421d serves as a transmission portion that meshes with the first gear 7432 of the drive device 7430. In the present embodiment, the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 are rotated by the same drive motor 7431 with the same gear ratio, so that the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 are rotated. Means that the rotation speed, the rotation start timing, and the rotation end timing are the same.

Similar to the first annular member 7421, the second annular member 7422 has a cylindrical main body portion 7422a and a plurality of openings formed by removing the wall portion in the widthwise central portion of the main body portion 7422a. 7422b, a recessed fitting portion 7422c in which the outer peripheral surface is recessed in the main body portion 7422a toward the center of rotation on the outer side in the width direction with respect to the widthwise central portion where the opening 7422b is opened, and the recessed portion 7422c. A gear 7422d that is formed over the circumference on the outer side in the width direction of the installed fitting portion 7422c is mainly provided, and unlike the first annular member 7421, at the boundary portion between the main body portion 7421a and the opening portion 7421b. A plurality of convex portions 7422e that are convexly provided on the inner peripheral side are mainly provided.

The configurations of the recessed fitting portion 7422c and the gear 7422d are similar to those of the recessed fitting portion 7421c and the gear 7421d of the first annular member 7421, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The opening portion 7422b is composed of three opening portions that are opened to a size that allows the game balls to pass through, and openings that are bored over 60 degrees around the rotation axis are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees. That is, every time the second annular member 7422 rotates by 60 degrees, the portion arranged below the rotation shaft is replaced by the main body portion 7422a and the opening portion 7422b. Unlike the opening 7421b of the first annular member 7421, the side surface surrounding the opening 7422b is formed perpendicular to the circumference.

The convex portion 7422e is a portion that is convexly formed in a strip shape in the left-right direction that moves the game ball in the rotation direction when the game ball rolls on the main body portion 7422a, and an adjacent opening near the entrance. The side surface on the opposite side of the portion 7422b is formed as an inclined surface facing the opposite side of the opening 7422b. In the present embodiment, the protruding portion 7422e is arranged at the boundary between the main body portion 7422a and the opening 7422b, and the protruding portion 7422e is disposed at the boundary between the main body portion 7422a and the opening 7422b. The installation portion 7422e is not arranged.

The driving device 7430 is a device that generates a rotational driving force of the rotation distributing device 7420, and includes a driving motor 7431 supported in a state where the rotation shaft is inserted into the motor support hole 7412 and a rotation shaft of the driving motor 7431. A first gear 7432 that is fixed and meshed with the first annular member 7421, and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 7431 coaxially with the first gear 7432 and meshed with the second annular member 7432. And a second gear 7433 that is mainly provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first gear 7432 and the second gear 7433 are configured by gears of the same shape, and the gears 7421d and 7422d of the rotary distribution device 7420 are configured by gears of the same shape. The gear ratios of the annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 are the same.

The specific area holes 7440 are provided inside the lateral support pillars 7413a, the first specific area holes 7441, the second specific area holes 7442 arranged inside the left support pillars 7411L, and the inside of the right support pillars 7411R. The third specific area hole 7443 to be arranged is mainly provided.

The 1st specific area hole 7441 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the 1st specific area for 16 round big hits, and the 1st specific area switch 2441a is arranged inside. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 7441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

The 2nd specific area hole 7442 and the 3rd specific area hole 7443 have the same internal shape as the 1st specific area hole 7441, and the 2nd specific area hole 7442 places a game ball in the 2nd specific area for 7 round jackpot. It is a hole for guiding, and the third specific area hole 7443 is different for being a hole for guiding a game ball to the third specific area for three round jackpot. That is, the second specific area switch 2442a is arranged inside the second specific area hole 7442, and the third specific area switch 2443a is arranged inside the third specific area hole 7443.

Thereby, the game sphere that passes through the second specific area hole 7442 and passes through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a, passes through the third specific area hole 7443, and passes through the third specific area. The game sphere to be played is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

In addition, by protruding the time limit blocking plate 2411 (see FIG. 40) above the first specific area switch 2441a, the second specific area switch 2442a, and the third specific area switch 2443a in the protruding state, It is possible to prevent (delay) the game ball from flowing down the specific area holes 7441, 7442, 7443.

Here, as shown in FIG. 85, the distances H1 to H3 from the specific area holes 7441 to 7443 to the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 7442 to the second specific area switch 2442a is made longer than the distance (distance H1) from the first specific area hole 7441 to the first specific area switch 2441a, The distance (distance H3) from the third specific area hole 7443 to the third specific area switch 2443a is made longer than the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 7442 to the second specific area switch 2442a (distance H3). H1<distance H2<distance H3).

As a result, when the game balls fall from the vicinity of the upper ends of the specific area holes 7441 to 7443 at the same timing, the shorter specific area switches 2441a to 2443a of the distances H1 to H3 are effectively detected. Can win jackpots with more rounds.

The game ball drive device 7450 is rotatably supported by a pair of support holes 7414 and a pair of support holes 7414 that serve as a rotation shaft of the drive motor 7451 that is retained while the rotary shaft is inserted through the pair of support holes 7414. It mainly includes a cylindrical shaft rod member 7452 that is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 7451 and a spiral screw member 7453 that is integrally molded with the shaft rod member 7452.

The screw member 7453 is a member integrally molded with the shaft rod member 7452, and is formed in a state where a thin plate is spirally wound around a columnar portion 7453a having a columnar shape and the outer peripheral surface of the columnar portion 7453a. And a spiral plate portion 7453b.

The diameter of the cylindrical portion 7453a is formed such that the distance between the rotation distribution device 7420 and the inclined floor 7412 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed between the rotation distribution device 7420 and the inclined floor 7412, and the columnar portion 7453a.

In the spiral plate portion 7453b, the distance between adjacent thin plates in the left-right direction is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball is housed between the adjacent plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b and can be moved leftward based on the rotation of the screw member 7453. In addition, in this embodiment, the distance between adjacent plates is designed to be 25 mm.

The width of each support pillar 7411L, 7411R in the left-right direction is 20 mm, and the specific region holes 7442, 7443 are arranged at the center position in the left-right width direction of each support pillar 7411L, 7411R (see FIG. 101(a)). ).

In addition, the diameter of the spiral plate portion 7453b in the axial direction is equal to or smaller than the inner diameter of the locus of the protruding portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422. This prevents the rotation distribution device 7420 and the screw member 7453 from interfering with each other.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the spiral plate portion 7453b is formed as a left-handed screw with the right end portion as a base point. Therefore, the game ball can be moved to the left by rotating the screw member 7453 clockwise with the right end visually recognized (right view). In the present embodiment, the screw member 7453 is rotationally driven in a constant drive mode in which the stored game ball is moved leftward at a speed of 10 mm (V=10 mm/s) after the power is turned on.

The phase relationship between the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. The phase relationship described below is merely an example, and the phase relationship between the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 is not limited to this.

85(a) is a front view of the second flow-down device 7400, and FIG. 85(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first annular member 7421 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85(a). FIG. 85C is a sectional view of the second annular member 7422 taken along the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85A. In FIG. 85(a), the drive device 7430 is not shown for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c), the opening 7421b of the first annular member 7421 is a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the first annular member 7421 in the front upper side (FIG. 85(b)). And the horizontal line, the boundary between the main body portion 7422a of the second circular ring member 7422 and the opening 7422b is on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the second circular ring member 7422 when it is accommodated in the upper left region. It is composed of the phase relationships arranged in. The state shown in FIGS. 85(b) and 85(c) will be described as being defined as the initial state of the rotary distribution device 7420.

The annular members 7421 and 7422 are rotationally driven counterclockwise at a speed of 60 degrees (10 rpm) in FIGS. 85(b) and 85(c). Further, the driving start timing is controlled by the fact that the game ball wins the fixed area switch 340a (see FIG. 5), and is stopped and controlled after being rotationally driven for several seconds. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the driving motives of the screw member 7453 and the annular members 7421 and 7422 are made different, it is difficult for the player to predict the motion pattern, and the annular members 7421 are difficult to predict. It is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being biased by so-called timing hitting in which the posture of 7422 is determined and the game ball is shot.

In this embodiment, the widthwise dimensions of the main body portions 7421a and 7421b (excluding the gears 7421b and 7422b) of the annular members 7421 and 7422 are set to 20 mm, and the openings 7421b and 7422b are 12 mm in the widthwise direction, respectively. It is arranged at the center in the width direction. Since the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm, the game ball moving leftward by being pushed by the screw member 7453 is positioned at the center position in the width direction of the openings 7421b and 7422b, and inside the openings 7421b and 7422b. When the specific area holes 7442 and 7443 corresponding to are not arranged (when they do not fit together), the game ball passes to the left.

Further, the distance between the main body portions 7421a and 7422a of the annular members 7421 and 7422 (ignoring the gear 7422) is set to 30 mm.

Therefore, after the game ball is arranged at a position where it can fall into the third specific area hole 7443 (center position in the width direction of the first circular ring member 7421), a position where the second specific area hole 7442 can fall (second circular ring) The moving distance until it is arranged at the widthwise center position of the member 7422 is defined as 50 mm. That is, the game ball reaches the center position of the second specific area hole 7442 in about 5 seconds after passing through the center position of the third specific area hole 7443, during which each of the annular members 7421, 7422 is 300 degrees ( It rotates by an angle of 300 degrees counterclockwise in FIGS. 85(b) and 85(c) (that is, it is the same as the state rotated by 60 degrees clockwise).

Next, the operation of the second annular member 7422 will be described. The second annular member 7422 is a member that determines whether to drop the game ball into the third specific region hole 7443 or to let the game ball flow down to the left without dropping into the third specific region hole 7443, and the game ball to the left. It is configured to be able to form a plurality of modes in which it flows downward.

86(a) and 86(b) are sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). It should be noted that FIG. 86(a) shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 30 degrees from the initial state, and FIG. 86(b) shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 86(a). Is illustrated. That is, FIG. 86(b) shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 86(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 86(a), when the center position of the game ball is located at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, the game is played after 1 second has elapsed. By moving the ball 10 mm leftward, the center position of the game ball moves to the widthwise center position of the second annular member 7422, so the widthwise center of the second annular member 7422 shown in FIG. 86(b). The center position of the game ball is arranged at the position.

In this case, since the opening 7422b is arranged below the game ball when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, the game ball falls into the third specific area hole 7443. To do.

87(a) and 87(b) are sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). It should be noted that FIG. 87(a) shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 330 degrees from the initial state, and FIG. 87(b) shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 87(a). Is illustrated. That is, FIG. 87(b) shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 87(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 87(a), when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, the game is played after 1 second has elapsed. By moving the ball to the left by 10 mm, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position of the second annular member 7422 in the width direction, so the center of the second annular member 7422 in the width direction shown in FIG. 87(b). The center position of the game ball is arranged at the position.

In this case, since the wall surface of the main body portion 7422a is arranged below the game sphere when the center position of the game sphere is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, the game sphere is the third specific area hole 7443. 85(a) leftward (FIG. 87(b) depth direction, second specific area hole 7442 side direction) without falling. At this time, since the load for moving the game ball in the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction is not given to the game ball from the second annular member 7422, the game ball passes while being positioned at the bottom of the second annular member 7422. To do.

In this case, by the driving force of the screw member 7453, it passes through the tilting floor 7412 while being located at the lowermost portion of the upper surface of the tilting floor 7412, and reaches the first annular member 7421, so that the second specific area hole 7442 is played. Whether or not the sphere falls depends on the state of the first annular member 7421.

88(a) and 88(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a). 88(a) shows the state of the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 87(b), and in FIG. 88(b), it is rotated counterclockwise by 300 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 88(a). The situation is illustrated. That is, FIG. 88(b) shows a state in which about 5 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 88(a).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball moves from the center position of the second ring member 7422 to the center position of the first ring member 7421 in about 5 seconds. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second ring member 7422 in FIG. 87(b) reaches the center position of the first ring member 7421 in the state shown in FIG. 88(b). In the state shown in FIG. 88(b), since the opening 7421b is arranged below the game ball, the game ball passes through the opening 7421b and falls into the second specific area hole 7442.

With reference to FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the case where the game ball flows into the rotation distribution device 7420 at another timing will be described.

89(a) and 89(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). Note that FIG. 89(a) shows the initial state, and FIG. 89(b) shows the state rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 89(a). That is, FIG. 89(b) shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 89(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 89(a), in the case where the center position of the game ball is located at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, after 1 second has elapsed, the game By moving the ball 10 mm to the left, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, so the center of the second annular member 7422 in the width direction shown in FIG. 89(b). The center position of the game ball is arranged at the position.

In this case, when the center position of the game sphere is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, the end of the wall surface of the main body portion 7422a is arranged below the game sphere, so that the game sphere is the third specified It does not fall into the area hole 7443, but passes to the left side in FIG. The second annular member 7422 rotates counterclockwise 30 degrees (0.5 seconds) from the state shown in FIG. 89(b), whereby the opening 7422b is arranged below the game ball. At that time, , The center position of the game ball has moved 5 mm from the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422 (the game ball is being pushed by the screw member 7453), and the game ball and the third specific region hole 7443 Since the position is shifted, the game ball does not fall into the third specific area hole 7443 and moves to the left in FIG. 85(a).

At this time, since the load for moving the game ball in the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction is not given to the game ball from the second annular member 7422, the game ball passes while being positioned at the bottom of the second annular member 7422. To do.

In this case, by the driving force of the screw member 7453, it passes through the tilting floor 7412 while being located at the lowermost portion of the upper surface of the tilting floor 7412, and reaches the first annular member 7421, so that the second specific area hole 7442 is played. Whether or not the sphere falls depends on the state of the first annular member 7421.

90A and 90B are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85A. Note that FIG. 90(a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 89(b), and in FIG. 90(b), the state shown in FIG. 90(a) is rotated counterclockwise by 300 degrees. The situation is illustrated. That is, FIG. 90(b) shows a state in which approximately 5 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 90(a).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball moves from the center position of the second ring member 7422 to the center position of the first ring member 7421 in about 5 seconds. That is, the game ball that has passed the second annular member 7422 in FIG. 89(b) reaches the center position of the first annular member 7421 in the state shown in FIG. 90(b). In the state shown in FIG. 90(b), the end of the main body portion 7421a is arranged below the game ball, so the game ball cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442, and the left side of FIG. 85(a) (FIG. 90(b), it flows down toward the inner side, to the first specific area hole 7441 side).

In this way, the first annular member 7421 distributes whether or not it falls into the second specific region hole 7442. A slight difference in the timing at which the game ball flows into the rotation distribution device 7420 (for example, a difference of 0.5 seconds) makes it possible to change which specific region hole 7441 to 7443 the game ball falls into. As a result, the degree of attention of the game ball passing through the rotation distribution device 7420 can be improved.

Up to this point, the case where the game ball passes through the second annular member 7422 and flows down the lowermost portion of the second annular member 7422 has been described. Next, a case where the second annular member 7422 is lifted up from the lowermost portion and passes through the second annular member 7422 will be described.

91(a) and 91(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85, and FIG. 91(c) is viewed in the direction of arrow XCIc in FIG. 91(a). 7 is a partial inner view of a second annular member 7422 of FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 91(a) shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees from the initial state, and FIG. 91(b) shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 91(a). Is shown, and the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is shown by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 91(b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in I9(a).

As shown in FIG. 91, the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 91(a), and after about 2 seconds has passed, the game ball is It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422, and is brought to the position shown in FIG. 91(b) by the protruding portion 7422e in about 2 seconds (of the second annular member 7422). The game ball is lifted (up to half the radius). The game ball is pushed from here to the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed toward the tilted floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 91(b). Therefore, when rolling the tilting floor 7412, the gaming ball flows down the tilting floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

As shown in FIG. 91(c), in the convex portion 7422e, in the vicinity of the entrance, the side surface on the opposite side of the adjacent opening portion 7422b is formed as an inclined surface facing the opposite side of the opening portion 7422b. , When the game ball flows into the second annular member 7422 in a state of being in contact with the end of the convex portion 7422e, the game ball is provided on the opposite side of the opening 7422b (the side where the wall of the main body 7422a is located). It can be easy to guide.

Thus, the second annular member at a timing such that the game ball comes into contact with the end of the protruding portion 7422e (timing that the game ball swings to the main body portion 7422a, the opening portion 7422b, or cannot be immediately determined). When flowing into 7422, it is possible to make it easier for the player to roll the game ball in a direction in which it is of great benefit to the player.

Therefore, the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the end of the protruding portion 7422e is not the timing of mere distribution of dropping to the third specific region hole 7443 with a probability of 1/2, but the second annular member 7422. Can be produced as the timing of a great chance that the game ball easily passes to the second specific area hole 7442 side. As a result, it is possible to increase the timing at which the player's interest is increased.

FIG. 92 is a partial top view of the second downflow device 7400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XCII in FIG. 85(a). In addition, in FIG. 92, an example of a path of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 is illustrated by a curve. Further, a period t until the game ball passes is illustrated with reference to the end portion of the tilting floor 7412 on the second annular member 7422 side.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the game ball is pushed to the tilted floor 7412 from the state shown in FIG. 91(b), the game ball switches the downward flow in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 about every one second. It flows down while shaking in a manner (illustrated by the arrow in the figure). Therefore, as shown in the position near the period t=4, when the game sphere passes through the first annular member 7421, the positions of the game sphere and the second specific region hole 7442 are displaced, so that the second specific region hole It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping on the 7442.

93(a) and 93(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a). Note that FIG. 93(a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 91(b), and in FIG. 93(b), it is rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 93(a). The situation is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 93(b) is shown after a lapse of about 4 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 93(a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 91(b) is the first annular member. The state at the timing of being arranged at the center position of the 7421 in the width direction is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 93B, at the timing when the center of the game sphere is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the second specific region hole 7442 is inside the region of the opening 7421b in a top view. Since the game ball is placed in the second specific area hole 7442, the game ball can fall into the second specific area hole 7442.

When the game ball passes through the lowermost portion of the inner surface of the first annular member 7421, the game ball mostly falls into the second specific area hole 7442 in the state shown in FIG. 93(b), As described above with reference to FIG. 92, in the present embodiment, the game ball can be swung in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412. Thereby, while the game ball is not arranged at the lowermost part of the first ring member 7421, the game ball can flow down in such a manner that the game ball passes through the center position of the first ring member 7421 in the width direction. Even if the first ring member 7421 is in the state of FIG. 93(b), the game ball does not drop into the second specific area hole 7442, and the game ball moves the first ring member 7421 to the position shown in FIG. a) It can be configured to pass to the left side (FIG. 93(b) rearward direction, the inclined flow channel 7413 side direction (see FIG. 83)) (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 93(b)).

Therefore, if the game ball swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (if the flow mode of the game ball is different from usual), it is possible to increase the probability of being profitable to the player. Therefore, attention to the flow mode of the game ball You can improve your strength.

Moreover, what is shown in FIG. 92 is an example of how the game balls flow down. For example, when the game balls catch on a part of the upper surface of the tilting floor 7412 and decelerate, and the degree of convergence rises, the game balls become This may also occur when the position of the second specific area hole 7442 matches.

Therefore, even if the game ball flows down from the same height of the second annular member 7422 to the tilted floor 7412 and swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412, the flow path of the game ball does not always become the same. Therefore, while maintaining the expectation when the game ball sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (the expectation that it may pass the first annular member 7421 to the left), It can be directed to watch the mode to the end. Thereby, the attention power of the game ball flowing down the second downflow device 7400 can be improved, and based on this, the attention power of the second downflow device 7400 itself can be improved.

94(a) and 94(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). Note that FIG. 94(a) shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 150 degrees from the initial state, and FIG. 94(b) shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 94(a). Is shown, and the game ball P75 rolling on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is shown by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 94(b) corresponds to the state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 94(a).

As shown in FIG. 94, the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 94(a), and after about 2 seconds has passed, the game ball is It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 94(b) by the protruding portion 7422e within about 2 seconds (of the second annular member 7422). The game ball P75 is lifted up to the height of the radius. From here, the game ball P75 is pushed toward the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed toward the tilted floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 94(b). Therefore, when rolling the tilting floor 7412, the gaming ball P75 flows down the tilting floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

FIG. 95 is a partial top view of the second downflow device 7400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XCII in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 95, an example of a path of the game ball P75 flowing down the tilted floor 7412 is illustrated by a curve. Further, a period t until the game ball P75 passes is illustrated with reference to the end portion of the tilting floor 7412 on the second annular member 7422 side.

As shown in FIG. 95, when the game ball is pushed out to the tilting floor 7412 from the state shown in FIG. 94(b), the game ball moves downward in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412 about every 1.2 seconds. It flows down while swinging in a mode of switching to (illustrated by an arrow in the figure). Since the swing width is larger than that in the aspect shown in FIG. 92, the switching interval is long. Also in this example, as shown in the position near the period t=4, when the game ball P75 passes through the first annular member 7421, the positions of the game ball P75 and the second specific region hole 7442 are displaced, It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling into the second specific area hole 7442.

Here, in FIG. 92, in the position near the period t=4, the game ball P75 is arranged at the position where the swing direction is switched (position away from the second specific region hole 7442), whereas in FIG. 95, At the position of the period t=4, the game ball P75 is arranged closer to the second specific area hole 7442 than at the position where the swing direction switches.

That is, by changing the way the game ball P75 swings to the way the game ball P74 swings, it is possible to increase the types of effects by the action of the game ball, and at the same time, at the position of the period t=4, the game ball and the second specific area. By changing the degree of positional deviation from the hole 7442, the probability of whether or not the game ball P75 falls into the second specific area hole 7442 can be changed, so that the attention of the game ball can be improved. ..

96(a) and 96(b) are sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a). 96(a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 94(b), and in FIG. 96(b), it is rotated counterclockwise by 240 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 96(a). The situation is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 96(b) is shown after a lapse of about 4 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 96(a), and the game ball P75 shown in FIG. 94(b) is the first ring. The state at the timing when the member 7421 is arranged at the center position in the width direction is shown.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), the second specific region hole 7442 is inside the region of the opening 7421b in a top view at the timing when the center of the game sphere is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421. Therefore, the game ball P75 can fall into the second specific area hole 7442.

When the game ball P75 passes through the lowermost part of the inner surface of the first annular member 7421, the game ball mostly falls into the second specific region hole 7442 in the state shown in FIG. 96(b). As described above with reference to FIG. 95, in the present embodiment, the game ball can be swung in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412. Thereby, while the game ball is not arranged at the lowermost part of the first ring member 7421, the game ball can flow down in such a manner that the game ball passes through the center position of the first ring member 7421 in the width direction. Even if the first ring member 7421 is in the state shown in FIG. 96(b), the game ball P75 does not drop into the second specific area hole 7442, and the game ball P75 shows the first ring member 7421. 85(a) can be configured to pass to the left (FIG. 96(b) rearward direction, inclined flow channel 7413 side direction (see FIG. 83)) (shown in phantom in FIG. 96(b)). ..

Accordingly, if the game ball P75 swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (if the flow mode of the game ball is different from usual), it is possible to increase the probability of being profitable to the player, and thus to the flow mode of the game ball. You can improve your attention.

Further, FIG. 95 shows an example of how the game ball P75 flows down. For example, when the game ball P75 catches on a part of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 and decelerates, and the degree of convergence rises, This may occur when the sphere P75 and the second specific area hole 7442 are aligned with each other.

Therefore, even if the game ball P75 flows down from the same height of the second annular member 7422 to the tilted floor 7412 and swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412, the flow path of the game ball P75 is always the same. Since it is not limited, the game ball P75 is maintained while maintaining the degree of expectation in the case where the game ball P75 swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412 (the degree of expectation that the first ring member 7421 may be passed to the left). It can be directed to watch the flow-down aspect of P75 to the end. Thereby, the attention power of the game ball P75 flowing down the second downflow device 7400 can be improved, and based on this, the attention power of the second downflow device 7400 itself can be improved.

97(a) and 97(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). It should be noted that FIG. 97(a) shows a state rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 97(b) shows a state rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 97(a). Is shown, and the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is shown by a solid line and an imaginary line. Note that the state shown in FIG. 97(b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in I15(a).

As shown in FIG. 97, the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 97(a), and after about 2 seconds has passed, the game ball is It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 97(b) by the protruding portion 7422e in about 2 seconds (of the second annular member 7422). The game ball is lifted (up to half the radius). From here, the game ball is pushed toward the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed out toward the tilted floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 97(b). Therefore, when rolling the tilting floor 7412, the gaming ball flows down the tilting floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

98(a) and 98(b) are sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a). Note that FIG. 98(a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 97(b), and in FIG. 98(b), it is rotated counterclockwise by 240 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 98(a). The situation is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 98(b) is shown after a lapse of about 4 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 98(a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 98(b) is the first annular member. The state at the timing of being arranged at the center position of the 7421 in the width direction is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 98(b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the wall portion of the main body portion 7421a covers the second specific region hole 7442. Since it is arranged in the manner, the game ball cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442.

In FIGS. 97 and 98, since the game ball is pushed out to the tilting floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 97(b) (the same height position as the height position shown in FIG. 91(b)), the tilting floor 7412 flows down. The flow-down mode of the game balls to be performed is the same as the mode described in FIG.

On the other hand, unlike the case described with reference to FIG. 93, even if the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 in a state where the game ball is arranged at the lowermost portion of the first annular member 7421, It does not fall into the specific region hole 7442 and passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow channel 7413.

That is, even when the game balls flowing down while swinging on the tilted floor 7412 in the circumferential direction of the arc are the same, the cases where the game balls can fall into the second specific area hole 7442 and the cases where they cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442. And can be clearly separated.

Therefore, the flow mode of the game ball flowing down while swinging on the tilted floor 7412 in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, the swing converges before reaching the first annular member 7421, and the maximum of the first annular member 7421. Even when the game ball has settled in the lower part, whether the game ball that has flowed into the first annular member 7421 falls into the second specific region hole 7442 or passes to the inclined flow path 7413 side is finished ( It can be eliminated until the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421), and the attention of the game ball can be improved.

Further, the difference in the attitude of the first annular member 7421 at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 is caused by the difference in the convex portion 7422e for lifting the game ball. ..

Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp which convex portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422 is lifting the game ball, the game ball flows down the tilted floor 7412 from the first circle. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the attitude of the first annular member 7421 when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the annular member 7421.

In addition, in the present embodiment, all the three openings 7422b have the same size, and a characteristic pattern is not attached to the main body portion 7422a (for example, filling with one color or the same regardless of the phase). By forming a stripe pattern or the like visually recognized in color), it is difficult to grasp which one of the pair of protruding portions 7422e lifts the game ball.

99(a) and 99(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). It should be noted that FIG. 99(a) shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 270 degrees from the initial state, and FIG. 99(b) shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 99(a). Is shown, and the game ball P76 rolling on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is shown by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 99(b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 99(a).

As shown in FIG. 99, the game ball is placed at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 99(a), and after about 2 seconds has passed, the game ball is It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 99(b) by the protruding portion 7422e within about 2 seconds (of the second annular member 7422). The game ball P76 is lifted (up to the height of the radius). From here, the game ball P76 is pushed toward the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed toward the tilted floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 99(b). Therefore, when rolling the tilting floor 7412, the game ball P76 flows down the tilting floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

100A and 100B are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85A. Note that FIG. 100(a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 99(b), and in FIG. 100(b), it is rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 100(a). The situation is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 100(b) is shown after a lapse of about 4 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 100(a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 100(b) is the first annular member. The state at the timing of being arranged at the center position of the 7421 in the width direction is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the wall portion of the main body portion 7421a is located above the second specific region hole 7442. The game balls cannot fall into the second specific area holes 7442, because they are arranged in a manner to cover each other.

In FIGS. 99 and 100, since the game ball is pushed out to the tilted floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 94(b) (the same height position as the height position shown in FIG. 94(b)), the tilted floor 7412 flows down. The flow-down mode of the game balls to be performed is similar to the mode described in FIG.

On the other hand, unlike the case described with reference to FIG. 95, even if the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 in a state where the game ball is arranged at the lowermost portion of the first annular member 7421, It does not fall into the specific region hole 7442 and passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow channel 7413.

That is, even when the game balls flowing down while swinging on the tilted floor 7412 in the circumferential direction of the arc are the same, the cases where the game balls can fall into the second specific area hole 7442 and the cases where they cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442. And can be clearly separated.

Therefore, the flow mode of the game ball flowing down while swinging on the tilted floor 7412 in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, and the swing converges before reaching the first annular member 7421, and the maximum of the first annular member 7421. Even when the game ball has settled in the lower part, whether the game ball that has flowed into the first annular member 7421 falls into the second specific region hole 7442 or passes to the inclined flow path 7413 side is finished ( It can be eliminated until the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421), and the attention of the game ball can be improved.

Further, the difference in the attitude of the first annular member 7421 at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 is caused by the difference in the convex portion 7422e for lifting the game ball. ..

Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp which convex portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422 is lifting the game ball, the game ball flows down the tilted floor 7412 from the first circle. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the attitude of the first annular member 7421 when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the annular member 7421.

In addition, in the present embodiment, all the three openings 7422b have the same size, and a characteristic pattern is not attached to the main body portion 7422a (for example, filling with one color or the same regardless of the phase). By forming a stripe pattern or the like visually recognized in color), it is difficult to grasp which one of the pair of protruding portions 7422e lifts the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 100, the maximum amplitude is the pattern of the flow pattern of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 swings along the circumferential direction of the arc of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412. It is possible to form at least two different types of flow-down modes, and if the flow-through modes of the first annular member 7421 to the inclined flow channel 7413 side are largely different while maintaining the respective flow-down modes, there is a large difference. It can be configured in such a manner as to allow it.

That is, while maintaining the flow-down mode of the game ball that swings on the tilted floor 7412 after being lifted by the protruding portion 7422e, the game ball is moved to the second annular member 7422 without changing the operation control of the rotation distribution device 7420. It is possible to configure a state in which the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the side of the inclined flow path 7413 depending on the timing of flowing into the.

In the present embodiment, the inflow sensor 7416 (see FIG. 84) detects the timing at which the game sphere flows into the screw member 7453. Therefore, the specific sphere hole of the game sphere can be determined from the phase of the first annular member 7421 at that timing. It is possible to recognize whether or not it has flowed into the screw member 7453 at the timing of dropping to 7441 to 7443, and this can be utilized for effect control.

For example, when it is the timing when it is determined that the game ball will fall into the first specific area hole 7441, a flashy effect indicating that the maximum profit has been obtained is displayed between the spiral plate of the screw member 7453 by the game ball. It can be performed as a look-ahead effect from the inside. That is, by pre-reading the difference in profit that will be obtained depending on the flow mode of the game ball by control, and giving the difference in the strength of the effect when the game ball flows down the second flow-down device 7400, the effect is improved. It is possible to give a role as something directly connected to the interests of the player, not just liveliness.

As a result, if the flow mode of the game ball is the same (for example, the flow mode shown in FIG. 92), whether or not the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421 to the inclined flow channel 7413 from the player's perspective. Although it is not known, the control side can recognize that the passage is almost to the inclined flow path 7413 side (for example, refer to the above description in FIG. 98).

Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to prevent the flow-down mode of the game ball and the effect from being linked with each other in a one-to-one manner, and when the flow-down mode of the game ball is the same as usual, another effect is given. However, it is possible to prevent it from being determined as a lively production (so-called “gase production”). As a result, it is possible to improve the power of attention to the flow-down mode of the game ball.

101(a) and 101(b) are cross-sectional views of the second downflow device 7400 taken along the line CIa-CIa in FIG. 85(b). In addition, in FIG. 101(a), the tilting floor 7412 is in an upward state, and in FIG. 101(b), the tilting floor 7412 is in a downward state. Further, FIG. 101(a) shows a game ball P78 located at the left end position OUT of the second annular member 7422 and a game ball P79 located at the right end position IN, and in FIG. 101(b), A state about 0.5 seconds after the state shown in FIG. 101A is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), when the game ball P78 is not on the tilted floor 7412, the tilted floor 7412 is in the upward state, and the overhanging member 7411h is arranged outside the inner surface of the third specific area hole 7443. It In this state, the game ball P79 can fall into the third specific area hole 7443.

When 0.5 seconds elapses from the state shown in FIG. 101(a), the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453 and moves to the left by about 5 mm, so that the game ball on the left side as shown in FIG. 101(b). P78 rides on the tilted floor 7412, and the tilted floor 7412 is in a downward state due to the weight of the game ball P78.

In this state, since the projecting member 7411h projects inward of the inner surface of the third specific region hole 7443, the opening of the third specific region hole 7443 can be narrowed, so that the game ball P79 is the third specific region hole. It is possible to prevent the 7443 from falling.

Therefore, when the game ball P78 that has flown into the screw member 7453 first passes through the second annular member 7422 to the left (toward the second specific region hole 7442 side), the game ball P79 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 afterwards. However, it is possible to prevent the game ball P78 from falling into the third specific area hole 7443 in which only a smaller profit than the profit obtained by the game ball P78 that has flowed in first is obtained. As a result, when the two game balls P78 and P79 flow into the second downflow device 7400, the game ball P79 that flows in later can obtain a profit more than that obtained by the game ball P78 that flowed in first. Therefore, after the flow path through which the previous game ball P78 passes is determined, it is possible to further improve the attention to the later game ball P79.

Further, since the game ball P78 stays on the upper surface of the tilting floor 7412 for about 3 seconds, the tilting floor 7412 returns to the upward state before the game ball P79 that flows into the screw member 7453 later passes through the second annular member 7422. It can be prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to achieve the above effect, the spacing between the plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b of the screw member 7453 is configured to be 20 mm or more apart (in the present embodiment, the spacing is about 25 mm. ). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the subsequent game ball P79 from dropping into the third specific area hole 7443 before the overhanging operation of the overhanging member 7411h.

In the present embodiment, since the spacing between the plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b is configured to be approximately 25 mm, when two game balls reach the third specific area hole 7443, a 2.5 second interval (second The second circular ring member 7422 passes through the center position of the second circular ring member 7422 at an interval of rotating the second circular ring member 7422 by 150 degrees. Therefore, due to the structure of the second annular member 7422 (the structure in which the opening of the opening 7422b is arranged on the side opposite to the wall of the main body 7422a by 180 degrees), when one game ball falls into the opening, the other game is played. The ball is easy to ride on the wall.

Therefore, even when the time blocking plate 2411 is not provided, at least one of the game balls can be easily fed to the left of the second annular member 7422.

In addition, when the two game balls both ride on the wall portion of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, from the arrangement of the protruding portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422 (arrangement every 120 degrees, one place It is possible to easily rock at least one of the game balls in the circumferential direction of the second ring member 7422 (from the arrangement omission). For example, in the case where a rear game ball is placed behind the game ball P72 shown in FIG. 87(a) with one plate of the spiral plate portion 7453b interposed therebetween and flows into the second annular member 7422, FIG. When the second annular member 7422 is rotated by 150 degrees (2.5 seconds) from the state shown in () (see FIG. 91(a)), the subsequent game ball flows into the second annular member 7422.

In this case, the game ball P72 shown in FIG. 87(a) does not abut the projecting portion 7422e and does not swing in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 7422, but the game shown in FIG. 91(a). The sphere P74 abuts the protruding portion 7422e and moves between the second annular member 7422 and the first annular member 7421 while swinging in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 92(b)). Therefore, at least one game ball is caused by a plurality of game balls continuously flowing into the screw member 7453 (driven by the operation of the screw member 7453 while sandwiching one plate of the spiral plate portion 7453b). Can be easily swung in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 7422, and the player's expectation can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the two game balls are collectively entered into the second downflow device 7400, so that the action of the rotation distribution device 7420, the game ball driving device 7450, and the game ball causes the game ball to play. Is configured to pass through the second annular member 7421 to the left. That is, it becomes possible for a player to win a jackpot with a higher profit (7 round jackpot, 16 round jackpot).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of winning the jackpot, a case where the game ball is moved in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 7422 and a case where it is not formed are randomly formed. Since the distribution (probability) of the profits that can be obtained is changed, the attention of the flow mode of the game ball can be improved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the game balls have the same trajectory, it is possible to form a pattern that can be any jackpot (7 round jackpot, 16 round jackpot) in each of the trails. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention force of the manner in which the game ball flows down regardless of the flow path of the game ball that has passed the second annular member 7422 to the left.

Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 130. Note that, in the first control example, the electrical configuration is configured by the block diagram described above with reference to FIG. 4, so refer to FIG. 4 as appropriate.

102 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the first control example, and FIG. 103(a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 104(b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the first control example, and FIG. 104(a) schematically shows the contents of the first per random number table in the first control example. 104(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 in the first control example and the small hit determination value in the first special symbol, and FIG. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 in the first control example and the small hit determination value in the second special symbol, and FIG. 104(d) is the first control. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol in an example.

In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and display setting on the second symbol display device (not shown). Execute. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 102, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, and display setting on the second symbol display device, MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Used in.

For the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the first hit type used for selecting the hit type of the special symbol A counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3 used to select a stop type out of a special symbol, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a variation pattern selection. And the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 119). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to winning in the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27, which is composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) And a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning in the middle starting winning opening 28 are provided respectively, and in each of these areas, the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 or the middle starting winning opening The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored according to the timing of entering the mouth 28. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the normal starting openings (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the balls are left starting winning opening 26 and right starting winning opening 27 or middle starting winning opening 28. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning. Then, the value of the random number that hits the special symbol is set by a first per random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 is When it matches the value of the random number that is a hit set by the random number table per 1, it is determined that the special symbol is a hit. In addition, the first random number table 202a of the special symbol is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0 to 399", which is "0 to 399". If so, it is determined that it is a small hit (small hit probability=1/1).

The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a small hit, and one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to be added, reach a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), and then return to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that hits the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the time when the special symbol is off. However, in the present embodiment, since the small hit probability is 1, the small hitting probability is not displayed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a small hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the time of the small hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the small hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 119) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal starting opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by a second random number table 202c (see FIG. 104(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number which is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is for non-time saving (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and time saving (period in which the symbol is in the time saving state, the period during which the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is greater than 0). ) And the number of random numbers included in each of which is a big hit are set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between non-time saving time and time saving time.

Returning to FIG. 102, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 102, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

It should be noted that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main process (see FIG. 119) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 118). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 117) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 103(b), the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, stay counter 203l, notification counter 203m, remaining sphere timer flag 203n, remaining sphere timer 203o, discharge number counter 203s, It has a time saving medium counter 203t, a big hit start flag 203v1, a big hit middle flag 203v2, a small hit start flag 203w1, a small hit medium flag 203w2, a V entrance passage flag 203x1, a V flag 203x2, and another memory area 203z.

As shown in FIG. 102, the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas The values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on winning in the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 are stored.

More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27, and the acquired data is four pieces. Among the vacant areas of the holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbol lottery is performed, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a only in that the counter values obtained for winning the medium start winning a prize mouth 28 are stored respectively, and other Since the configuration is the same, detailed description is omitted.

Normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 reserve sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b, one execution area and four reserve areas (holding first area to reserve fourth area) ) And have. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either of the left and right normal starting ports 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas of (Area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the prize stored in another reserved area, The shift processing is performed to pack the data of No. 1 into the reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is a first special symbol (first symbol) that is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) into the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display up to 4 times at maximum. This special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time the ball enters the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 and the number of holding balls of variable display increases. , 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S404 in FIG. 112). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 110).

The value of this special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number command (S211 of FIG. 110, FIG. 112). (See S405). The special symbol 1 holding sphere number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is changed, by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the fluctuation held by the main control device 110. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of retained balls displayed. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual sphere of the variable display suspended by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the command of the number of reserved balls to be received next.

The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d in that it is different in that the number of held spheres held is stored in the medium starting winning opening 28. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 holding sphere number command.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of four times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device based on the passage of the sphere at the normal starting port 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the normal starting opening 67 and the number of spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

When the ball passes through either the right or left normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a second random number counter C4 Value is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the right or left normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c ( 114, S703: No).

The number-of-wins counter 203j is the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball winning device device 190 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls that have entered the movable ball winning device device 190). It is a counter for counting the number. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) provided in the movable ball winning combination device 190, it is updated by adding one by one. On the other hand, when one round is finished, it is determined whether the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of the discharged prizes (the value of the discharge count counter 203s) of the movable prize winning combination device 190 match. (S1267 of FIG. 123), the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the large opening solenoid 209a is set to ON (excitation).

The retention counter 203l includes a retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described above in the first embodiment, an electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described in the second, sixth, and seventh embodiments and a seventh implementation. This is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the drive motor 7451 (see FIG. 83) described above in the mode is set to ON (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, the retention counter 203l has a predetermined period (5 seconds in the first embodiment, the second embodiment and the sixth embodiment) based on the game ball passing through the fixed area hole switch 340a (see FIG. 5). A counter value corresponding to 12 seconds in the embodiment and 14 seconds in the seventh embodiment is set (S724 in FIG. 116). On the other hand, in the process of S1322 of the small hit ending process (FIG. 125, S1312) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated.

Further, based on the fact that the value of the stay counter 203l is determined to be 0 (S1323: Yes in FIG. 125), the stay solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the sixth embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described in the seventh and seventh embodiments and the drive motor 7451 described in the seventh embodiment are set to OFF (see FIG. 23). The staying counter 203l is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the staying counter 203l and controlling the device such as the staying solenoid 413 to prevent the game balls from flowing down, the winning in the specific area hole 440 depends on the number of the gaming balls that have won in the fixed area hole 340. Can be controlled. That is, it is possible to prevent all the game balls from passing through the third specific area hole 443 (the specific area hole having the specific area switch that gives the smallest profit to the player).

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting the notification effect (the sound and the lighting effect in the present embodiment) for attracting the player's attention. In the present embodiment, one second corresponds to the timing at which the game ball passes through each of the starting winning openings 26 to 28 and the end timing of the fifteenth round (10 balls winning or 30 seconds have passed to the movable ball winning accessory device 190). The notification counter 203m is set. The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 by the notification processing of the main controller 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described processing for outputting the sound and lighting.

With such a configuration, the player is made aware that the timing at which the game ball can enter the movable ball-accommodating accessory device 190 is approaching, or that the jackpot game is about to end. Since it can be set, the game ball is not fired toward the movable ball game device device 190 at the timing when the movable ball game device device 190 is opened, or the movable ball game device device 190 is used even though the jackpot game is finished. It is possible to reduce wasted balls due to continuing to fire.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the movable piece 190a of the movable ball winning accessory device 190 is closed at the timing of the end of the round in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the movable piece 190a of the movable ball winning combination device device 190 is set from the open state to the closed state at the timing of the round end of one round. .. When the remaining sphere timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining sphere timer 203o described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1264 in FIG. 123). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the movable piece 190a is closed, and determines whether or not the time necessary for discharging the game ball in the movable ball winning accessory device 190 has elapsed. This is a counter for determining.

The remaining ball timer 203o wins the movable ball winning combination device 190 when the preset one round ends and the movable piece 190a of the movable ball winning combination device 190 closes at the timing of the end of the round. It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the game ball to be discharged has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls that have won the movable ball winning combination device 190 are discharged is 4 seconds. In the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is the remaining ball timer 203o in advance. Is set as the upper limit of. Based on the upper limit value (2 seconds in this embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203o, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the movable ball winning combination device 190 and the number of dischargings thereof match. (S1267 in FIG. 123). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly inform that the game ball is clogged in the movable ball winning accessory device 190.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge detection switch 190c (see FIG. 2) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls won in the movable ball winning combination device 190 and the discharged number are determined (S1271 in FIG. 123).

The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. The time saving medium counter 203t is set to 100 when it is detected that the game ball has passed the time saving switch 190d (see FIG. 2). That is, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the game ball has passed the time saving switch 190d, the time saving game state is changed to 100 times after the jackpot game is over.

The big hit start flag 203v1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is the big hit start timing. This jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON (see S1327 in FIG. 125) when it is detected that the game ball has passed any of the specific area switches 441a to 441c (see S1324 in FIG. 125), and the jackpot. It is referred to in the control process to determine whether it is the big hit start timing (see S1101 in FIG. 120), and is set to OFF when the big hit control process determines that it is the big hit start timing. (See S1133 in FIG. 121). As a result, it is possible to execute processing according to the jackpot start timing.

The big hit medium flag 203v2 is a flag used for determining whether or not a big hit is being made, that is, whether a big hit game is being executed. The big hit medium flag 203v2 is set to ON when it is detected that the game ball has passed any of the specific area switches 441a to 441c (see S1324 in FIG. 125), like the big hit start flag 203h described above. (See S1327 of FIG. 125), and is referred to in the jackpot control process to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (see S1103 of FIG. 120), and it is the timing of ending the jackpot in the jackpot control process. If it is determined to be off, it is set to off (see S1114 in FIG. 120).

The small hit start flag 203w1 is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. This small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process, which is executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see S302 in FIG. 111). Then, the small hit control process is referred to for determining whether it is the small hit start timing (see S1301 in FIG. 124), and when it is determined that the small hit start timing is in the small hit control process. Is set to OFF (see S1302 in FIG. 124).

The small hitting flag 203w2 is a flag used to determine whether or not the small hitting is in progress, that is, whether or not the small hitting game is being executed. The small hitting medium flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process, similarly to the small hitting start flag 203w1 described above (see S302 in FIG. 111). Then, the small hit control process is referred to for determining whether or not the small hit is in progress (S1305 in FIG. 124), and is turned off when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the end timing of the small hit. It is set (S1330 in FIG. 125).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, etc. are set (stored).

Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 104A to 104C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first per random number table 202a, and FIG. 104D is a schematic diagram of the contents of the above second per random number table 202c. It is the schematic diagram shown.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), the first winning random number table 202a has a value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is acquired by the game ball entering the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not it is a small hit, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired by the game ball entering the medium starting winning opening 28 is a small hit. A special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for determining whether or not there is provided.

Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is, as shown in FIG. 104(b), in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, in the lottery. It is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) to be judged is set. In the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C1 is “0 to 399”, and if “0 to 399”, it is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1.

On the other hand, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. 104(c), a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the medium starting winning opening 28. Is a set table. In the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C1 is "0 to 399", and if "0 to 399", it is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1.

As described above, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first hit random number counter C1, when the first special symbol is drawn based on the entry into the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, the total number of random number values to be a small hit is 400, so the first The probability of winning a special symbol is "400/400 (=1)".

In addition, during the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the medium start winning hole 28, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits of the second special symbol is 400, the probability of being a small hit of the second special symbol. Is "400/400 (=1)".

As shown in FIG. 104(d), in the second random number table 202c, there are 24 random number values that are the winning symbols for the normal symbols when the time is not shortened, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for non-time saving. In this way, when the normal symbol is non-time saving, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, the probability of being a jackpot of ordinary symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol non-time saving, when the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the middle start winning port 28 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is a non-time saving ordinary symbol, when the ordinary symbol hits, the medium starting winning opening 28 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time", The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, during the time saving, there are 200 random numbers that are big hits for the normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for time saving. In this way, during the time saving, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, so the probability of being a jackpot for a normal symbol is "5/6".

When the pachinko machine 10 is an hour-shorter time, when the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device. To be done. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is displayed as, and the middle start winning opening 28 is opened for "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the time is shortened, the variable display time is extremely short, “30 seconds→3 seconds”, as compared with the time when the probability of the normal symbol is low, and the release period of the medium start winning opening 28 is “0. 2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, which is very long, so that the ball easily enters the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27.

In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a shorter working time, when the normal symbol hits, the medium start winning opening 28 is opened by "1 second×2 times", but the opening time and the number of times are arbitrary. You can set it to. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

In addition, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 28a is also displayed. Is opened for a predetermined time.

Here, the electric accessory 28a in the present control example rotates in a double-opened manner with a pair of shafts facing the front-rear direction of the game board 13 as rotation axes by the operation of the electric accessory solenoid 209b. The electric accessory 28a performs a rotating operation (opening operation) in a double-opened manner to guide the game ball into the middle start winning port 28. On the other hand, by performing a rotating operation (closing operation) in a manner of closing from both sides toward the center, the game ball does not be guided to the middle start winning port 28 (does not enter).

As will be described in detail later, the electric accessory 28a in the present control example is opened for 2 seconds during the time saving, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds during the time saving. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 28a is 0.2 seconds, which is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the middle start winning port 28. Therefore, even if the value of the second random number counter C4 is won when the time is not shortened, it is not possible to win the game ball to the middle start winning hole 28. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the player tries to enter the medium start winning opening 28 even though he/she is not in the time saving (the jackpot with the time saving is not revealed).

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main controller 110, the small hit lottery and the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol display are performed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as lottery of display results in the device.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, fluctuation patterns of the respective kinds of fluctuation patterns are set in counter values for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the judgment, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105(b). As shown in FIG. 105(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, an effect counter 223f, and a wing entrance. At least a passage counter 223i, a V entrance passage counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result or the like of the reserved balls before the start of variation.

Like the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37, and the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect that is held in (4) at maximum. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command (see S206 and S211 of FIG. 110) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is used. , The number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is managed.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, or the variation in the special symbol in the main controller 110. When the display is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1702 in FIG. 129). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c stores the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b on the basis of the holding sphere number command output from the main control unit 110 to the number of holding spheres corresponding to the second special symbol. However, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although illustration is omitted, it is updated by one each time the main processing (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 128) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

The wing entrance passage counter 223i is a counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball winning accessory device 190. This wing entrance passage counter 223i is incremented by 1 when a wing entrance passage command transmitted when a game ball passes through the special winning opening switch 190b is received (S712 in FIG. 115). The wing entrance passage counter 223i is referred to when setting the effect command for display in the lamp editing process (S1606 and S1609 in FIG. 128), and is set to 0 after the effect command for display is set in the lamp editing process. It is initialized (S1604 in FIG. 128).

The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the fixed area switch 340a of the movable ball winning accessory device 190. The V entrance passage counter 223j is incremented by 1 when the V entrance passage command transmitted when the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a is received (S1737 in FIG. 130). The V entrance passage counter 223j is referred to when setting the display effect command in the lamp editing process (S1621 in FIG. 128), and is initialized to 0 after the display effect command is set in the lamp editing process. (S1605 of FIG. 128).

The round number cumulative counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the big hit game when the big hit or the small hit continues. The round number cumulative counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S1724 in FIG. 130), and is initialized when a jackpot end command is received ( S1728 in FIG. 130).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 128) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

FIG. 106 is a game flow diagram showing, as an example, the flow of a game by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The normal game by the pachinko machine 10 is started by driving (launching) a game ball into the game area. The flow of the game will be described below on the assumption that the game ball is launched. In addition, in the description in FIG. 106, FIGS. 1 and 2 are appropriately referred to.

In the process of the game ball flowing down in the game area, if any of the left starting winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27 is entered, the left starting winning opening switch corresponding to each starting winning opening. 210a, the middle start winning a prize opening switch 210c or the right starting winning a prize opening switch 210b detects the passage of the game ball, the special design lottery is done on the occasion of this being detected.

The special symbol lottery is a lottery relating to whether or not to operate the movable ball winning accessory device 190. In the present embodiment, it is set so as to be a small hit regardless of which random number in the first random number table 202a is drawn (small hit probability=1/1), so the special symbol lottery has a confirming role. It is a lottery. In addition, when the game ball does not enter any of the starting winning openings, the game flow ends for the time being, and the game flow is started again with the aim of entering the starting winning opening (F01).

Although not particularly shown, when the special symbol lottery is performed, after the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined variation time on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, it is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the lottery result. .. Regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol by the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, it may be randomly changed by lottery or may be fixed to a constant variation pattern.

Here, in the present embodiment, while the first special symbol lottery (internal lottery) is carried out triggered by the ball entering the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, entering the middle starting winning opening 28 A second special symbol lottery (internal lottery) is performed as a trigger.

And since the winning probability (small hitting probability) of the special symbol lottery is set to 1 (=1/1), if the game ball enters any of the starting winning openings, it will correspond to the small hit as it is. Become. Therefore, it is not necessary for the main controller 110 to acquire the hit determination random number internally, but in the present embodiment, the hit determination random number is acquired.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the hit (the so-called direct hit, the direct hit) in which the big hit game is directly executed by the entrance to each start winning hole is not provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a direct hit hit, the hit hit judgment may be performed using the hit judgment random number acquired here.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol does not have a display mode of “out”, and the lottery for the first special symbol corresponds to “small hit 1”, and the lottery for the second special symbol corresponds to “small hit 2”. It is supposed to be. The difference between "small hit 1" and "small hit 2" is related to the number of times the movable ball winning accessory device 190 is activated. If the ball hits 2 times, the movable ball winning accessory device 190 is actuated twice.

In any case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b in the form of a small hit, the movable ball winning accessory device 190 is activated (opening operation) triggered by this (F02). The operation of the movable ball winning accessory device 190 changes the movable piece 190a to the open position as described above, but in the present embodiment, the "small hit" is performed over a predetermined opening time (for example, about 0.5 seconds). It is assumed that the movable piece 190a is opened only once in the case of "1" and twice in the case of "small hit 2".

Next, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening switch 190b when the movable ball winning accessory device 190 is activated (F03). Here, when the game ball enters the special winning opening switch 190b, the game flow further proceeds to the sorting operation in the movable ball winning combination device device 190. In addition, when the game ball does not enter the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball winning combination device 190, the game flow ends for the time being, and the game flow is again aimed at entering the starting winning opening (F01). Will start.

When the game flow progresses into the movable ball inputting device device 190, it is determined whether or not the game ball has finally passed any one of the specific areas through the various game ball distribution operations as described above. (F04). As a result, when the game ball is finally discharged from the movable ball winning combination device 190 without passing through the specific area, unfortunately the game flow ends there, and the start winning hole (F01) is newly entered. Aiming to start the game flow.

On the other hand, when a specific area of the game ball passes in the movable ball winning combination device 190, the movable ball winning combination device 190 is activated again. Specifically, for example, either the special winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, once) over a predetermined opening time (for example, 30 seconds), or a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls are won. A special game (big hit game) of executing one round until the condition is satisfied and repeating this round for a predetermined number of continuous operations is executed.

In the present embodiment, the number of continuous operations (the number of rounds) is set to 16 times when the game ball passes the first specific area switch 441a, and 7 times when the game ball passes the second specific area switch 442a. When the game ball passes through the third specific area switch 443a, it is set to three times. During such a big hit game (while the movable ball winning accessory device 190 is operating), a large number of balls can be generated in the large winning opening switch 190b which is normally closed in a short period of time. Players can collectively get a lot of prize balls.

In the present embodiment, the movable ball winning accessory device operation (F02) is the first round. Therefore, the number of rounds in which the player can actually collect a large number of prize balls is the number of times (15 times, 6 times) obtained by subtracting 1 from each of the continuous operation times (16 times, 7 times, 3 times) described above. 2 times).

In addition, during a special game (big hit game), an opening formed as an inlet of a flow path that allows a game ball to directly flow into the back side of the game board 13 from the introduction passage 310 and passes through the discharge detection switch 190c (FIG. (Not shown) is opened, the game ball flows down from the middle of the introduction passage 310 to the back of the game board 13, and the game ball moves the first downflow device 300 and the second downflow device 400 like a small hit game. It prevents it from flowing down.

As a result, the game ball is directly flown from the opening to the discharge detection switch 190c. Therefore, the special game can be played without the time required to pass through the first downflow device 300 and the second downflow device 400, and the processing time of the abnormal processing (see FIG. 123) described later can be shortened. In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball that has passed the special winning opening switch 190b passes through the opening (not shown) arranged in the middle of the introduction passage 310, the discharge detection switch 190c is switched in 4 seconds at the maximum. Configured to pass.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game ball detected in the specific area passage (F04) has passed the time saving switch 444a (F06). Here, if the game ball has passed the time saving switch 444a, after the jackpot game is over, the game flow proceeds to the time saving game in which the electric accessory 28a operates a prescribed number of times (F07). At this time, during the short game, the game balls are likely to be introduced into the middle start winning hole 28, so that the movable piece 190a is easily opened, and the distribution game in the movable ball winning combination device 190 is frequently performed. Therefore, it is easy to win the jackpot in succession.

When the game ball has not passed through the time saving switch 444a, the game flow ends for the time being, and the game flow starts again with the aim of entering the starting winning opening (F01).

FIG. 107 is a time chart illustrating the flow from winning a prize to the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 to the occurrence of a jackpot game in this control example. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later.

Based on the winning of the game ball into the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, the main controller 110 performs the variation control of the first special symbol. Then, when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main controller 110 starts the small hit control 1 (also referred to as the small hit game 1), the large opening solenoid 209a that operates the movable piece 190a is turned on ( Open state). In this state, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball-operated object device 190, and when a game ball enters the movable ball-operated object device 190, The game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340 or the detachment hole 350 and flows down to the back of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the flow of the small hit control 1 by the main controller 110 will be described. Here, the total time of the small hit control 1 is set to 7.5 seconds. First, when a set time t1 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the small hit control 1 is started, the large opening solenoid 209a opens for a set time t2 (for example, about 0.5 second). Next, when the set time t3 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed and it is not detected that the game ball has passed the fixed area switch 340, the small hit game is ended. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient for the game ball flowing down the movable ball winning accessory device 190 to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c when the set time t2 has elapsed.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the finalized area switch 340a, the main controller 110 ends the small hit control 1 based on the fact that the game ball passes through the finalized area switch 340a, and the set time t10 (first embodiment). 5 seconds, 12 seconds in the second and sixth embodiments, and 14 seconds in the seventh embodiment). The stay solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the sixth embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the form and the seventh embodiment or the drive motor 7451 described above in the seventh embodiment is driven to allow the game balls to stay, and then, for example, the stay in the first embodiment. By stopping the driving of the solenoid 413 and setting the downflow prevention plate 412 in the retracted state, the big hit game control of different round number is performed based on which of the specific area switches 441a to 443a the downflowing game ball has passed through. The details of the jackpot game will be described later.

Next, differences from FIG. 107 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a time chart for explaining the flow from winning a prize to the medium start winning port 28 to occurrence of a big hit game in this control example. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later.

Based on the winning of the game ball to the middle start winning hole 28, the main controller 110 performs the variation control of the second special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main controller 110 starts the small hit control 2 (also referred to as the small hit game 2), the large opening solenoid 209a that operates the movable piece 190a is turned on ( Open state).

Next, the flow of the small hit control 2 by the main controller 110 will be described. Here, the total time for the small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when a set time t4 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the small hit control 2 is started, the large opening solenoid 209a opens for a set time t5 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). Next, when the set time t6 (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the large opening solenoid 209a opens for the set time t7 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). After that, when the set time t8 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed and it is not detected that the game ball has passed the fixed area switch 340, the small hit game is ended. The set time t8 is set to a time sufficient for the game ball flowing down the movable ball winning accessory device 190 to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c when the set time t7 has elapsed.

On the other hand, when the game ball has passed the confirmed area switch 340a, the main controller 110 ends the small hitting game control based on the fact that the game ball has passed the confirmed area switch 340a, and the set time t10 (first embodiment). 5 seconds, 8 seconds in the second and sixth embodiments, and 10 seconds in the seventh embodiment) for the retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the sixth embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment and the drive motor 7451 described above in the seventh embodiment are driven, and, for example, the downflow prevention plate 412 (see FIG. 23) is in an extended state. Based on which of the specific area switches 441a to 443a the flowing down game ball passes by making the game ball stay in that state, then deenergizing the staying solenoid 413 and setting the downflow blocking plate 412 in the retracted state. Then, the jackpot game control of different number of rounds is performed. The details of the jackpot game will be described later.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 109 to 125. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, the special symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process associated with a win (start winning) to the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 112.

After executing the start winning process, the second symbol display device performs a normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying (S106), the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 with the passage of the ball through Gate passing processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. After the through-gate passing process is executed, a wing entrance passing process is performed to perform an effect based on the fact that the game ball has entered the movable ball winning accessory device 190 (S140), and the game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340. Based on that, the V entrance passage process for controlling the jackpot game thereafter is executed (S141), the firing control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed ( (S109), the timer interrupt process ends.

Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109) to control the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Processing.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit now (S201). As the big hit, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B during the display showing a big hit (including during the big hit game), and during the predetermined time after the big hit game is included. If the result of the determination is that a big hit is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated.

If it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changed. If it is not inside (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (the number N2 of fluctuation display holdings in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e which shows the value of reservation sphere number command (special figure 2 reservation sphere number command) is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value of the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process is a process of determining a small hit variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (N2) is determined to be 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (N1) The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is subtracted (S210), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) indicating the holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Then, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a small hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. In the present embodiment, since the probability of a small win in the special symbol lottery is 1 (1/1), the main lottery has a meaning as a confirmation work.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Although the LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, the LED display may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process However, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a small hit (S243). In the processing of S243, when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is the small hit (S243: Yes), the small hit start setting processing is executed (S244). On the other hand, in the processing of S243, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit, this processing is ended. The details of the small hit start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111.

After the processing of S244 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is decremented by 1, and this processing is ended (S221).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning probability of the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is set to 1, but it is not limited to this. For example, the probability of a big hit in the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be 0.01, and the probability of a small hit may be 0.99.

Next, the small hit start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a small hitting start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process (S213).

In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, the opening scenario of the large opening solenoid 209a is set (S301). After that, the small hitting start flag 203w1 and the small hitting medium flag 203w2 are set to ON (S302), and this processing ends.

As the opening scenario, different opening modes are set depending on which special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is a small hit. That is, in this embodiment, the opening scenario of the mode illustrated in FIG. 107 (one-time opening) or the mode illustrated in FIG. 108 (two-time opening) is set.

Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), and whether or not there is a winning (starting prize) in the left starting winning port 26, the right starting winning port 27 or the middle starting winning port 28. Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process of the values when there is a start winning.

When the start winning process (FIG. 112, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the left starting winning port 26 or the right starting winning port 27 (starting winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of variable display holding in the special symbol is held) Is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether there is no winning in the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, the special symbol 1 reserved ball If the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes) The value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing as the processing from S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the medium starting winning opening 28. With respect to the winning of the medium starting winning opening 28, only the difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the medium start winning opening 28 (S407: No), the process is terminated after the process of S412.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device, and the electric winning combination that accompanies the medium starting winning opening 28. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 28a.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 113, S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. The middle and the middle are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit now (S609). The jackpot is included during the jackpot game and during the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in the middle (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the process of S609, if it is not a big hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not a big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. Therefore, the second random number counter acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of C4 and the random number table 202c for the second symbol for time saving, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol per random number table 202c for time saving. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 205 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 104(d)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal pattern, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 and the non-time saving Based on the second winning random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for non-time saving. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 104(d)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S612), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614: Yes), whether or not the present is a big hit. Is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit, in order to prevent the ball from entering the medium starting winning opening 28 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the number of times the opening of the electric accessory 28a and the opening time of the game ball It is set to a period (0.2 seconds) in which the ball cannot be entered. As a result, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball due to the game ball entering the middle start winning port 28 during the big hit game, and it is possible to prevent the number of discharged balls from greatly changing.

In the process of S615, if it is not a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not a big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal design, an electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640. The opening period of 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal pattern, the opening period of the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning port 28 is 0.2 seconds. Is set to 1, and the opening count is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of place (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the processing of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during big hits, the time for normal symbols is very short, compared to non-time saving for regular symbols, the time for variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and the medium start winning opening Since the release period of 28 is extremely long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the medium start winning opening 28.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows.

By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 119) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the regular symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 113, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 28a is set by the processing in S625, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 119) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate 67), and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 114, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate 67) (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate 67) is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate 67) (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved sphere number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the wing entrance passage processing (S140) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the wing entrance passage process (S140) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

In the wing entrance passage processing (S140), when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the special winning opening switch 190b, it is first determined whether or not a small hit is in progress (S711). In the processing of S711, when it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S711: Yes), the wing entrance passage command is set (S712), and this processing is ended. When the small hit is not in progress (S712: No), it is the case where the game ball enters the special winning opening switch 190b even though it is not the small hit game. Therefore, an error command is set (S713), and this processing is executed. To finish.

The wing entrance passage command set in the process of S712 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the wing entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the special winning opening switch 109b, and produces an effect based on the passage of the special winning opening switch 190b to the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Send the command to execute. Thereby, it is possible to execute the effect during the small hitting game based on the ball entering the movable ball winning combination device 190 (see FIG. 106).

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the V entrance passage processing (S141) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage processing (S141). The V entrance passage process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

In the V entrance passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the fixed area hole 340 (S721). In the processing of S721, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the fixed area hole 340 (S721: Yes), the V entrance passage flag 203x is set to ON (S722), and the V entrance passage command is set (S723). The counter value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in the first embodiment, 8 seconds in the second and sixth embodiments, 10 seconds in the seventh embodiment) is set in the retention counter 203l (S724), and The process ends.

Note that while the stay counter 203l maintains a value of 0 or more, the corresponding drive device (the stay solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment). The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described in the embodiment and the drive motor 7451 (see FIG. 83) described in the seventh embodiment) are set to ON (excitation).

The V-entry passing command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S721 that the game ball has not passed through the fixed area hole 340, then it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to ON (S725). In the processing of S725, when it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S725: No), this processing ends.

When it is determined in the process of S725 that the V entrance passage flag 203x is set to ON (S725: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot type value corresponds to the jackpot C (S726). When it corresponds to the big hit C (S726: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the big hit C is set to ON (S727), and the process proceeds to S4604. The jackpot C corresponds to the 16 round jackpot.

On the other hand, in the processing of S726, when it is determined that the jackpot C does not apply (S726: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot D applies (S729). In the processing of S729, when it is determined that the big hit D is applicable (S729: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the big hit D is set to ON (S730), and the process proceeds to S4604. The jackpot D corresponds to the 7 round jackpot.

On the other hand, in the processing of S729, when it is determined that the jackpot D does not apply (S729: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot E corresponds or not (S731). In the processing of S731, when it is determined that the jackpot E corresponds to the jackpot (S731: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot E is set to ON (S732), and the process proceeds to S4604. The jackpot E corresponds to the three-round jackpot.

In the process of S731, when it is determined that the jackpot E does not correspond (S731: No), an error command is set (S733), and this process ends. In the present control example, after the game ball that has entered the movable ball game device 190 passes through the defined area hole 340, the jackpots that can be obtained are limited to jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E. Therefore, when the jackpot type value after passing V is not jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E, the V entrance passage process (S141) is executed based on the game ball passing through the defined area switch 340a. It is considered that the case is when a game ball is illegally won in the confirmed area switch 340a. In this case, by setting the error command in the processing of S731, the output of the error is executed, and the fraudulent activity can be found. When the processing of S727, S730, or S732 is completed, the time saving medium counter 203f is set to 0, and this processing is completed (S728).

By setting the time saving medium counter 203f to 0 in the process of S728, when the jackpot game is started, the time saving game is finished.

In the process of S141, one of the V flags 203x2 is set to ON, so that the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to OFF in the small hit ending process (see S1324 and S1328 of FIG. 125).

When the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to OFF, the jackpot type is no longer determined in the process of S141. Therefore, in the present control example, during the small hit game, of the specific area switches 441a to 443a, 2441a to 2443a, the jackpot type is determined by which switch the game ball passes first, and then the game ball No matter which specific area switch 441a to 443a and 2441a to 2443a passes, the passage is invalid (not reflected in the control).

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 in this case as well.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 of FIG. 119. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, a production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 119), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 109) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls won to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. Further, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 110) and the start winning process (see FIG. 112) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the number-of-holding-balls command set. Further, it transmits a command such as the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 120) to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed and the movable ball winning combination is performed. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the special winning opening switch 190b of the object device 190 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the jackpot opening switch 190b is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the jackpot opening switch 190b has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been placed in the jackpot opening switch 190b. .. When any of these conditions is established, the special winning opening switch 190b is closed. The opening and closing of the special winning opening switch 190b is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 119), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

Next, a small hit control process (S1041) for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is executed. In the small hit control process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update processing for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), variation display according to the variation pattern is started on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the change time elapses from the start of the change, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can check the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are executed. The variation display is ended, and in the display mode set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 113), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). ) Do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 117 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S1008 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is saved in the process when the power is shut down, the stack process is performed in the initialization process (S901). By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main interruption processing (see FIG. 119), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a big prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth switch 190b.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the V entrance passage process (see FIG. 116) is executed and then the big hit start is set (see S1327 in FIG. 125), it is determined that the big hit is started. In the process of S1101, if the big hit is started (S1101: Yes), the process of the big hit time accessory device operation start process (S1102) is executed, and the present process is ended. The processing of S1102 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the big hit is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the big hit is in progress (S1103). The big hits include a big hit (including a big hit game) being displayed and a predetermined time after the big hit game is finished. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1103: No), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1103: Yes), the jackpot time accessory device opening process (S1104) is executed, and then the process of S1105 is executed. The process of S1104 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1105, it is determined whether or not the value of the release number counter has reached the number of times (for example, one) set in the current round. In the process of S1105, when the value of the opening number counter has reached the number set in the current round (S1105: Yes), the special winning opening closing time timer countdown process is executed (S1106). On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when the value of the release counter does not reach the number set in the current round (S1105: No), the abnormal process is executed (S1118), and the process is finished.

In the special winning opening closing time countdown process (S1106), the big hit time interval timer (S1149) set in S1104 is counted down.

Then, it is determined whether the closing time has elapsed (S1107). If the closing time has not elapsed (S1107: No), the abnormal process is executed (S1118), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if the closing time has elapsed (S1107: Yes), the round number counter is incremented (S1108). The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 203 with an initial value of 0, for example.

After the processing of S1108, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter has reached the execution round number (S1132) set in S1102. At this time, if the value of the round number counter has not yet reached the number of executed rounds (S1109: No), the process proceeds to S1115, and the round number command is set (S1115).

The land number command set in S1115 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing S1101 (see FIG. 119). The voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the current number of rounds based on the received number-of-rounds command, and reflect the result in the effect control during the big hit.

Next, the normal round special winning opening closing designation command is set (S1116). This command is for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the closing of the movable ball winning accessory device 190 after each round at the time of a big hit. The normal round special winning opening closing designation command is a command indicating that the movable ball winning combination device device 190 is closed in other than the final round. The command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119).

Next, the processing of S1117 is performed, the winning ball number counter counted in this round is reset (S1117), and at the same time, the value of the opening number counter is also reset, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1109, when the value of the round number counter reaches the number of execution rounds (S1109: Yes), this round is the final round, and then the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF. It is determined whether it has been done (S1110). In the processing of S1110, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is not set to OFF (that is, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON) (S1110: No), then the abnormality processing is executed. Then, (S1118), the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1110, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1110: Yes), the number of game balls that have flowed into the movable ball winning accessory device 190 and the discharged game. This is the case when the number of balls matches, and then the round number counter is reset (S1111).

Next, the final round special winning opening closing designation command is set (S1112). This command is for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the closing of the movable ball winning accessory device 190 in the final round at the time of a big hit. Here, the final round corresponds to 3 rounds if it is a big jackpot, 7 rounds if it is a 7 round jackpot, and 16 rounds if it is a 16 round jackpot.

Next, a jackpot end command is set (S1113), the jackpot flag is turned off (S1114), the process proceeds to S1117, and this process is finished. The final round special winning opening closing designation command and the jackpot end command are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119).

With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 121, the jackpot bonus device device operation starting process S1102 will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the jackpot device operation start process S1102.

First, the jackpot start waiting time timer countdown process is executed (S1130). In this process, main controller 110 sets an initial value in the jackpot start waiting time timer, and then counts down the timer (every time this module is called) with the passage of time. The initial value of the big hit start waiting time timer is set as a waiting time (for example, about several seconds) from the end of the operation of the movable ball winning accessory device 190 at the time of the small hit until the movable ball winning accessory device 190 is operated again. .. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, for example, a pre-start effect of a big hit game is performed by using this "big hit start waiting time".

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot start waiting time has elapsed (S1131). If the value of the jackpot start waiting time timer is not yet 0 (S1131: No), it is determined that the jackpot start waiting time has not elapsed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the big hit start waiting time timer becomes 0 (S1131: Yes), the processing proceeds to S1132 and thereafter.

Next, the number of execution rounds is set (S1132). In the present embodiment, the number of execution rounds (the number of continuous operations) to be set is three ways of “3 rounds”, “7 rounds”, and “16 rounds”. Which of the execution rounds is set is a big hit. The number of execution rounds can be set by checking the type status (checking the type of the V flag 203x2).

However, as described above, the initial opening (movement of a small hit) of the movable ball winning accessory device 190 corresponds to the first round. Therefore, here, the remaining "2 rounds", "6 rounds" or "15 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 203 as a corresponding value on the program.

Next, the jackpot flag is turned off (S1133), a jackpot start command is set (S1134), and this processing ends.

The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes effect control for starting the jackpot.

With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122, the jackpot time accessory device opening process S1104 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the jackpot device opening process S1104. In addition, this process is mainly for controlling the opening/closing operation of the movable ball winning accessory device 190 as an operation during a big hit game (special game).

First, the main control device 110 determines whether or not it is the opening timing of the special winning opening switch 190b (S1141). In the processing of S1141, when it is determined that it is the opening timing of the special winning opening switch 190b (S1141: Yes), the special winning opening switch 190b is opened (S1142). Specifically, the drive signal applied to the large opening solenoid 209a is output. As a result, the movable piece 190a of the movable ball winning accessory device 190 is activated, and the special winning opening switch 190b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Next, the jackpot release timer is set (S1143). The value of the timer set here is an opening time for each time the movable ball winning accessory device 190 is operated. In this embodiment, the total open time for one round (for example, about 30 seconds) is set as the value of the big hit open timer. With this opening time, a sufficient number (for example, about 10) of game balls can be won in the special winning opening during that time.

Next, the big hit time interval timer (special winning opening closing time timer) is set (S1144). The value of the timer set here becomes the waiting time between the rounds during the big hit or the waiting time at the end of the final round. The timer value is set to, for example, about 3 seconds (a numerical value longer than the set value of the remaining ball timer).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1141, when it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the special winning opening switch 190b (S1141: No), it is then determined whether or not the special winning opening switch 190b is open (S1145).

In the process of S1145, when it is determined that the special winning opening switch 190b is open (S1145: Yes), the open timer countdown process is executed (S1146). In this processing, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous processing of S1102 is executed. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (S1147: No), then, the number of winning balls Count processing is executed (S1149). In this process, the number of game balls that have won the movable ball winning combination device 190 within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the value of the count number is incremented based on the winning detection signal input from the special winning opening switch 190b within the opening time.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). The predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big hit, one time during a small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (S1150: Yes), this process ends.

If it is determined in S1147 that the opening time has ended (S1147: Yes), or if it is determined that the count number has reached the predetermined number in S1150 (S1150: No), then S1148 is executed.

In S1148, main controller 110 closes special winning opening switch 190b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the large opening solenoid 209a is stopped. As a result, the movable ball winning accessory device 190 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is turned on (S1151). Next, the interval waiting process (S1152) is executed. In this processing, the countdown of the interval timer set in the processing of S1102 is executed. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the value of the opening number counter is then incremented (S1153), and this processing ends. The value of the opening counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 203 with an initial value of 0, for example.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1145, when it is determined that the special winning opening 190b is not open (S1145: No), this processing is ended.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1118). In the abnormality processing (S1118), processing for monitoring whether or not the special winning opening switch 190b is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 123, S1118), first, it is determined whether it is the round valid period (S1261). If it is outside the round valid period (S1261: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1263). Then, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

In the process of S1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S1265). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (2 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1266). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1266: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of ejected coins (total value of the ejected number counter 203s) and the winning number (value of the winning number counter 203j) match (S1267). ..

If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). Then, the process of S1269 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the movable ball winning combination device 190 and prevent the game ball from passing through the fixed area hole 340 after the jackpot game is over.

In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1270). After that, the winning number counter 203j and the discharging number counter 203s are respectively reset to the initial values (S1271), and thereafter, this processing ends.

The small hit control process (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 119). This small hit control processing (S1040) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 119), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special design big hit state, execution of various effects according to the big hit and the movable entrance. It is a process for opening or closing the special winning opening switch 190b of the accessory device 190.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether the small hit is started (S1301). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the process of S4308 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 111), it is determined that the small hit is started. In the process of S1301, if the small hit is started (S1301: Yes), the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to OFF (S1302), the opening scenario is set (S1303), and the small hit start command is set. (S1304), the present process ends.

The small hit start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect of starting the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when the small hit is not started (S1301: No), it is determined whether the small hit is in progress (S1305). The small hitting determination is specifically made by determining whether the small hitting flag 203w2 is on. In the process of S1305, if the small hit is not in progress (S1305: No), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1305, when the small hit is in progress (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is the next opening timing (S1306). If it is the next opening timing (S1306: Yes), the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball winning combination device 190 is opened (S1307), and a command indicating the number of times of new opening is set (S1308). This process ends. The command indicating the number of times of release set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command indicating the number of times of opening, the voice lamp control device 113 starts the effect according to the number of times of opening.

On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if it is not the next opening timing (S1306: No), it is determined whether it is the closing timing of the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball winning combination device 190 (S1309). Specifically, when a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed after opening the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball winning combination device 190, it is determined to be the closing timing.

In the processing of S1309, when it is determined that it is the closing timing of the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball winning combination device 190 (S1309: Yes), the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball winning combination device 190. Is closed (S1310), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball winning combination device 190 is not satisfied (S1309: No), it is determined whether the period of the small hit has passed (S1311).

Specifically, it is determined that the period of small hits has passed when a predetermined period has passed from the start of small hits for each small hit opening scenario. That is, in the small hit control 1, when 7.5 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit (see FIG. 107), in the small hit control 2 when 10 seconds have passed from the small hit (see FIG. 108), the small hit It is determined that the period of has passed.

In the process of S1311, when it is determined that the small hit period has elapsed (S1311: Yes), the small hit end process is executed (S1312), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S1311, if it is determined that the period of the small hit has not elapsed (S1311: No), this processing ends.

Here, the details of the small hit ending process (S1312) will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the small hit ending process (S1312). The small hitting end process (S1312) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hitting control process that it is the timing of ending the small hits.

In the small hit ending process (S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is on (S1321). In the process of S1321, when it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is on (S1321: Yes), it is a case where the game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340 during the small hit game (of the specific area hole 440). Since this is the case where one of the specific area switches 441a, 442a, 443a has been passed), processing for starting the execution of the jackpot game is performed. First, the retention counter 203l is updated (S1322).

In the process of S1322, the retention counter 203l is updated by being decremented by 1. Further, based on the fact that the value of the retention counter 203l is 0 or less (S1323: Yes), the process proceeds to S1324.

Next, it is determined whether the V flag 203x2 is set to ON (S1324). In the process of S1324, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is set to ON (S1324: Yes), the opening scenario of the special winning opening switch 190b is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203x2 (S1325). ), the jackpot start is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203x2 (S1326). Next, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit medium flag 203v2 are set to ON (S1327), the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to OFF (S1328), and the V flag 203x2 is set to OFF (S1329). Move to processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1323, when it is determined that the retention counter 203l is larger than 0 (S1323: No), or in the processing of S1324, the V flag 203x2 is not set to ON (that is, the V flag 203x2 is OFF. (S1324: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S1321, when it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is not turned on (S1321: No), it means that the game ball has not passed through the fixed area switch 340a during the small hit game, so a big hit is awarded. In order to end without doing, a small hit end command is set (S1331), and the process proceeds to S1330.

The small hit end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit completion command, it selects the display mode of the small hit end effect based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 223, and the small hit end effect. To start.

After shifting to the processing of S1330, the small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to OFF (S1330), the opening scenario is cleared (S1332), and this processing is ended.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-on processing of S1512 (see FIG. 127) occurs due to the instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing ) Is started during the execution of () is determined (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 127, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1511 in FIG. 127), the power-off process in S1512 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1512 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1402: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1512 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the startup process of this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S1514 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1514, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1514 is executed (see S1513 of FIG. 127). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1514 is executed, the process of S1408 with the power-off flag being turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure occurs and the processing is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1514 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1408 is reached in the state where the power-off flag is off is that the present startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process of S1404 to S1406 is performed and then S1408 is executed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1409, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1409 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404 when the processing of S1408 is reached through the processing of S1406 through S1406. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S1501 this time has been executed (S1501), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1510 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1509. In the process of S1501, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1502 to S1509, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1510 is preferable to be executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1510 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1510 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1505 without performing the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the held quantity display updating process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the output of the display lamp 34 is switched to a low power setting. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number of holding balls counter 223b is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring/production process corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored. It is a process of setting to produce an effect.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1508), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the electric decorations 29 to 33 is set so as to correspond to the game state. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the game state, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting. The details of the ramp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S1509, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (S1510). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the command determination processing is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1511). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1511 (S1511: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process in-progress flag are both turned on (S1513), and the power-off process is executed (S1514). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1515), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1511 (S1511: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1512), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1512: No), the process returns to S1501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1512: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the lighting pattern of the illumination portions 29 to 33 does not change according to the game state. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Here, the lamp edit processing (S1508) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the ramp edit processing (S1508). The ramp edit process (S1508) is a process executed at 1 ms intervals in the main process (see FIG. 127).

In the lamp editing process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (S1601). In the process of S1601, if it is determined that the big hit is not in progress (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit is in progress (S1602).

In the processing of S1602, when it is determined that the small hit is not in progress (S1602: No), the current game state is a normal game state in which a game ball is shot aiming to proceed to the small hit game state. is there. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is set to the normal game effect pattern (S1603), the wing entrance passage counter 223i is set to 0 (S1604), and the V entrance passage counter 223j is set to 0. (S1605), this process ends.

In the processing of S1602, when it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S1602: Yes), the game ball has been won in any of the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28, and the special winning opening switch 190b is opened. As a result, since the game ball can flow into the movable ball input device 190a, the lamp outputs of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to the A1 pattern so that the player can grasp the fact. (S1606). In the present embodiment, in the A1 pattern, the illumination portions 29 to 33 emit blue light.

The A1 pattern is one of the outputs of the small hitting lamp. In the present embodiment, the output patterns A1 to A3 can be configured as different effect patterns of the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33.

For example, in the A1 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit blue light, in the A2 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit green light, and in the A3 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 turn red. By emitting light, it is possible to let the player grasp the degree of expectation of the jackpot. Note that the output pattern is not limited to three, and can be configured in any number, and is not limited to configuring the difference depending on the color, for example, the blinking speed and the light emission of the lamp. The difference may be configured by changing the direction of the.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1607). In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1607: Yes), the lamp outputs of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to the A2 pattern (S1608). In the present embodiment, in the A2 pattern, the illumination portions 29 to 33 emit light in green, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than blue.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223i is 2 or more (S1609). When it is determined that the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223i is 2 or more (S1609: Yes), the lamp outputs of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set to the A3 pattern (S1610), and the process proceeds to S1611. In the present embodiment, in the A3 pattern, the illumination portions 29 to 33 emit light in red, which has a higher expectation of jackpot than green.

That is, it is possible to change the color of the light emitted from the lamps of the illumination portions 29 to 33 during the small hit game in accordance with how many balls the game ball has passed through the special winning opening switch 190b. As described above in the first embodiment, when a plurality of game balls pass through the special winning opening switch 190b, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the special route hole 323, which is more likely to flow into the fixed area hole 340. Therefore, the number of game balls that have passed through the special winning opening switch 190b can be directly associated with the change in the degree of expectation of the jackpot, so that the change in the light of the illumination portions 29 to 33 is not merely a lively change, but a player's change. It can be done as something that changes in response to profits. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S1607, when it is determined that the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223j is not 1 or more (S1607: No), or when the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223j is smaller than 2 in the process of S1609. When it is determined (S1609: No), the process proceeds to S1611.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1611). In the process of S1611, when it is determined that the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1611: Yes), the current state is the state where the transition to the jackpot game is confirmed and the jackpot type is determined from now on. Is. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the winning acquisition effect pattern (S1612), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1611, if it is determined that the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is smaller than 1 (is 0) (S1611: No), the transition to the jackpot game is undetermined, so the electric The output state of the lamps of the decoration units 29 to 33 is maintained, and this processing ends.

In the processing of S1601, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1601: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the value of the round number cumulative counter 223k is 1 (S1620).

In the processing of S1620, when it is determined that the value of the round number cumulative counter 223k is 1 (S1620: Yes), the number of rounds of the big hit is undetermined.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is 1 (S1621). In the processing of S1621, when it is determined that the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is 1 (S1621: Yes), the current state is that one gaming ball passes through one of the specific area holes 440. It is a state in which the number of rounds of jackpots is determined based on, and there is still a possibility of winning the jackpots of three rounds. In this case, the lamp outputs of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to the B1 pattern, and this process ends (S1622). In the present embodiment, in the B1 pattern, the illumination portions 29 to 33 emit gold.

In addition, the B1 pattern is one pattern of the output for performing the first round of the output of the lamp for the effect of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the output patterns of B1 and B2 can be configured as different effect patterns of the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33.

For example, in the B1 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit gold, and in the B2 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit rainbow color, which increases the profit of the jackpot to the player. The degree of expectation can be grasped. It should be noted that the output pattern is not limited to two, and can be configured by an arbitrary number, and is not limited to configuring the difference by color, and for example, the blinking speed and the light emission of the lamp. The difference may be configured by changing the direction of the.

On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when it is determined that the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is not 1 (S1621: No), the current state is that the two or more game balls have any one of the specific area holes 440. It is a state where the number of jackpot rounds is determined based on passing. For example, in the first embodiment, in the process in which two or more game balls pass through the defined area hole 340 and flow down the inside of the second flow-down device 400, at least one game ball is flown to the third branch guide flow path R3. It is configured to go.

The game sphere that has flowed down the third branch guidance flow path R3 will pass through either the first specific area hole 441 (give 16 round jackpot) or the second specific area hole 442 (give 7 round jackpot), The passage timing is configured to be earlier than the passage timing when another game ball passes through the third specific area hole 443 (three round jackpot is given).

Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the third specific area hole 443, it is determined that the passing becomes invalid, so that the current state is likely to win the jackpot of three rounds. It has been excluded. In this case, the lamp output of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the B2 pattern, and this processing ends (S1623). In the present embodiment, in the B2 pattern, the lamps of the illumination portions 29 to 33 emit light in a rainbow color, which is higher in expectation of profit that can be obtained than in gold.

In the process of S1620, when it is determined that the value of the round number cumulative counter 223k is not 1 (S1620: No), the current state is that the number of jackpots is confirmed, and the jackpot game of two-round transition is performed. It is in a state of being. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the big hit game effect pattern (S1624), and the present process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal game state of the stage before advancing to the small hit game, the outputs of the lamps of the electric decorations 29 to 33 are set to the normal game effect pattern, and the small hit game state. In the case of shifting from the jackpot gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the output of the lamps of the illumination portions 29 to 33 is set to the winning acquisition effect pattern, the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming is fixed, and the remaining jackpot gaming is executed. The outputs of the lamps of the units 29 to 33 are set to the big hit game effect pattern.

In the states described here, the profits given to the player are fixed, so even if different colors are provided, the interest of the player is not improved, rather the eyes are stimulated by the change in the emission color. This leads to fatigue of the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being unnecessarily tired, in the normal game effect pattern, the hit acquisition effect pattern, and the jackpot game effect pattern, light of a similar color (for example, white light) is used. The lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are made to emit light. This makes it easy for the player to grasp the timing of profit determination.

Since the moment of winning the jackpot is the moment when the player's interest is most improved, the light emission intensity of the lamps of the illumination portions 29 to 33 according to the hit winning effect production pattern is set to be the same as the normal game effect. It is configured to be stronger than the light emission intensity of the lamps of the illumination portions 29 to 33 according to the pattern or the jackpot game effect pattern.

In FIG. 128, controlling the light emission of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 has been described, but in the processing of S1509, the sound effect output from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226 is also controlled in the same manner. To be done. That is, the sound changes based on the degree of expectation of the profit given to the player. For example, when the lamp outputs of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to the A2 pattern (S1606), the lamp outputs of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to the A2 pattern (S1608). , The output music is controlled in such a manner that the tempo of the music increases and the volume of the music increases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the command determination processing (S1510) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1510). This command determination process (S1510) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 127) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. ..

In the command determination process (FIG. 129, S1510), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area and analyzed, and the main control device 110 is read. It is further determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received (S1701). When the reserved ball number command is received (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special map 1 reserved ball number command or the special map 2 reserved ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times N1 the variable display is held in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of variable display pending in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1702).

Here, the special figure 1 reserve ball number command or the special figure 2 reserve ball number command, when the ball has won the right and left starting winning openings 26, 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28 (starting winning), or a special symbol lottery Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when is performed, every time the start winning is detected, or each time the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the process of S1702. The value of the reserve sphere number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserve sphere counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 reserve sphere counter 203d, the special symbol 2 reserve sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved sphere counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of the detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of S1702 is executed, the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are visibly arranged as a substitute for the liquid crystal display device for the player. A display reserved ball number command for notifying a 7-segment display (not shown) is set. Thereby, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the 7-segment display.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1701: No), it is determined whether or not a hit related command has been received (S1703). When the hit related command is received (S1703: Yes), the hit related processing is executed (S1704), and then this processing is ended.

In the process of S1703, when it is determined that the hit related command has not been received (S1703: No), it is then determined whether or not the notification command is received from the main control device 110 (S1705). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1705: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (for example, "stab a ball on the top") is selected, and the notification command is set (S1706). ..

Next, in the process of S1705, when it is determined that the notification command is not received (S1705: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed. Then, (S1707), the present process ends. If the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the 7-segment display, the command is the 7-segment display. The command is set to be sent to.

Here, the hit related processing (S1704) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the hit related processing (S1704). The hit related process (S1704) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 129) that the hit related command is received.

In the hit-related processing, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S1721: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S1722), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the 7-segment display (not shown).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S1721: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S1723). In the process of S1723, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S1723: Yes), 1 is added to the round number cumulative counter 223k (S1724). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223k (S1725), and this processing is ended.

In the processing of S1723, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S1723: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command is received (S1726). When it is determined in the process of S1726 that the jackpot end command has been received (S1726: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S1727), the round cumulative counter 223k is set to 0 (S1728), and this process is executed. finish.

In the process of S1726, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S1726: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S1729).

In the process of S1729, when it is determined that the small hitting start command has been received (S1729: Yes), the small hitting start command for display is set (S1730), and this process ends.

In the processing of S1729, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S1729: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S1731).

In the process of S1731, when it is determined that the small hit end command is received (S1731: Yes), the small hit end command for display is set in order to execute the effect suggesting the end of the small hit game (S1732). , This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1731, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S1731: No), it is determined whether or not the wing entrance passage command has been received (S1733).

In the processing of S1733, when it is determined that the wing entrance passage command is received (S1733: Yes), 1 is added to the wing entrance passage counter 223i (S1734). The wing entrance passage counter 223i added here is referred to in the lamp editing process described with reference to FIG. 128 in order to determine the number of game balls entering the movable ball winning combination device 190 during the small hit game. It

After the processing of S1734 is finished, a wing entrance passage command for display is set in order to execute an effect (see, for example, FIG. 128) based on a ball entering the movable ball winning accessory device 190 during the small hit game (S1735). ), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1733, when it is determined that the wing entrance passage command has not been received (S1733: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passage command has been received (S1736).

In the process of S1736, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command is received (S1736: Yes), 1 is added to the V entrance passage counter 223j (S1737). The V entrance passage counter 223j added here is referred to in the ramp editing process described with reference to FIG. 128 to determine the number of balls entered into the finalized area switch 340a during the big hit game (first round).

When the process of S1737 is finished, in order to execute the effect suggesting the big hit game start, the display V entrance passage command is set (S1738), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in the process of S1736, when it is determined that the V-entry passing command has not been received (S1736: No), the present process ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, depending on how many game balls have passed the special winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball winning combination device 190 and how many game balls have passed the defined area switch 340a. The mode is changed (see FIG. 128). As a result, even when the player is not paying attention to the game ball, it is possible to notify that the player is in a state advantageous to the player due to the effect mode, and the player may not miss the moment of the big hit. Can be prevented.

Further, as a result, it is possible to link the characteristic of the movable ball winning accessory device 190 (the characteristic in which the amount of profit that can be expected to be obtained changes depending on how many game balls are entered) and the effect. That is, the change in the effect can be configured as a change in the effect based on a change in the profit that can be expected to be obtained, instead of a change in the liveliness. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the effect.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the game ball that has entered the second branch region 420 of the second downflow device 400 immediately drops when it reaches the first delay preparation hole 423 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a driving member such as a solenoid is provided with a blocking member that projects inside the first delay preparation hole 423 for a predetermined period of time to prevent the game ball from falling, and the blocking member acts to the third branch region 430. The falling of the game ball may be stopped until the other game ball headed for passes through the specific area hole 440. In this case, the length of the second delay guiding flow path R6 can be shortened, and the space occupied by the flow path formed by the second flow-down device 400 can be saved.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the distributor 322 is arranged separately from the driving unit has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a locking member that projects toward the distribution body 322 may be provided every predetermined period, and the distribution body 322 may be fixed every predetermined period by the action of the locking member. In this case, when the distribution body 322 is fixed in the equilibrium state and only one game ball reaches the distribution body 322 and comes into contact with the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 is not rotated and the game ball moves to the special route hole 323. Run down. That is, even if only one game ball enters the first flow-down device 300, the game ball can enter the special route hole 323 every predetermined period.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the distributor 322 rotates is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sorting body 322 may slide left and right.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the frictional resistance generated between the shaft support rod 322f of the distributor 322 and the resistance extending portion 322d changes according to the rotation angle has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, while rotating coaxially with the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 does not engage until the distribution body 322 changes from the equilibrium state to the first angle state, and the distribution body 322 changes from the first angle state to the second angle state. May be provided with an engaging member that engages and rotates in synchronization with the distribution body 322. In this case, only the rotational resistance of the distribution body 322 is applied from the equilibrium state to the first angular state, while the rotational resistance of the distribution body 322 is added from the first angular state to the second angular state, and the engaging member Since the resistance of the engaging member due to the weight of the distribution body 322 is applied to the distribution body 322, the easiness of rotation of the distribution body 322 can be changed. The mode of engagement is not particularly limited, and for example, the engagement may be performed from the inside of the fan-shaped portion 322a or the outside of the fan-shaped portion 322a.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area hole 340, which of the specific area switches 441a to 443a the game ball that later passes through the specific area passes through is determined by the previous game ball. A case has been described in which random selection is performed regardless of whether the specific area switches 441a to 443a are passed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the subsequent game ball may pass through the specific area switches 442a and 443a which have a greater profit to be given to the player than the specific area switches 441a to 443a which the previous game ball has passed. In this case, while the player watches the flow-down mode of the game ball, the interest can be continuously improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the special winning opening switch 190b is normally closed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special winning opening switch 190b may be always open. In this case, the player is always in a state of aiming for a big hit, which can enhance the interest of the player.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the determination values of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 are all set as the same small hit determination value has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, different small hitting determination values may be set. In this case, for example, half of the determination values may correspond to the determination value that shortens after the big hit, and the remaining determination values may correspond to the determination value that does not shorten after the big hit. As a result, it is possible to sort whether or not the time saving will be provided after the big hit, without requiring the time saving switch 209d.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the corresponding drive device (for example, the stay solenoid 413) operates for a predetermined period after passing through the fixed area switch 340a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to perform a certain operation with reference to the operation timing of the movable piece 190a of the movable ball winning accessory device 190. In this case, the drive maintaining period of the drive device (for example, the retention solenoid 413) is set to be equal to or longer than the longest period required for the game ball to pass through the first downflow device 300 and reach the downflow blocking plate 412.

In the above-described third embodiment, the case where the pair of guide rails 3321 on which the game balls roll is formed of a downward convex curved shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of guide rails 3321 are each formed from a straight line shape intersecting at one point, and a large special route hole 3323 configured to allow a game ball to fall is formed outside the intersecting position. When the flowing down game balls collide at the intersecting position, the collision causes the game balls to fly outward, reach the special route hole 3323, and fall, while in the case of no collision, the end of the guide rail 3321. The game ball may be dropped to the normal route hole 3324 provided near the end of the guide rail 3321 until it rolls. In this case, the game ball falls into the special route hole 3323 at the tip of which it is blown outward due to the collision of the game ball, so that the game ball can be dropped into the special route hole 3323 without waiting for the deceleration of the game ball. it can. Therefore, the flow velocity of the game ball when the game ball falls into the special route hole 3323 can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the case where the central rail portion 3321a is also used as the pair of guide rails 3321 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the central rail portion 3321a may be individually provided for each of the pair of guide rails 3321, and the distance between the central rail portions 3321a may be a distance at which rolling game balls interfere with each other. In this case, for example, one central rail portion 3321a is formed in a meandering rail shape, and the other central rail portion 3321a is formed in a linear rail shape. The degree of interference between the game balls (the projected area in the traveling direction of the game balls) is different, and the flow-down mode of the game balls after the collision can be changed.

As a result, it is possible to change the period until the ball falls into the special route hole 3323 after the collision for each collision position (the game ball enters the second accessory device 400 after the game ball enters the movable accessory device 90). (It is possible to change the period until the ball is entered), and it is possible to suppress the timing hitting at which the game ball is shot by looking at the state of the movable plate 421a that automatically operates in the second downflow device 400.

In the sixth embodiment, in the case where the inlet opening 6440i of the specific area hole 6440 is configured to have a shape corresponding to the three specific area holes 6441 to 6443, and the profit increasing device 6450 is configured to include two rotating members. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific area hole is composed of four holes having different profits (for example, the specific area holes having different numbers of rounds for jackpots of 16 rounds, 12 rounds, 7 rounds, and 3 rounds), and the inlet opening portion 6440i corresponds thereto. The profit increasing device 6450 is composed of three shapes (four-hole shape), and is composed of three rotating members arranged at the entrances of the three specific area holes excluding the maximum profit specific area holes. Is also good. In this case, the game property when a plurality of game balls flow into the timed branch region 6410 can be made more complicated.

Here, each of the three rotating members is a ball that enters the game ball into a specific area hole that has a lower profit than the specific area hole immediately below (the position where the game ball that rotates the rotating member flows down as it is). It is configured to be closed depending on the state after the operation. In this case, for example, if four or more game balls flow into the timed branch region 6410 on the assumption that only one game ball is accommodated in each specific region hole, the game balls are all specified regions. The player can get the maximum profit because the game ball has passed through the hole, so that the game ball has passed through the specific region hole where the maximum profit can be obtained, but four or more game balls flow into the timed branch region 6410. It is difficult to get it done.

Here, for example, when two game balls successively flow into the timed branch region 6410, the previous game ball is guided to a specific region hole which gives the second highest profit (one profit below). By disposing the guide device on the upstream side of the specific area hole, the rotating member operated by the action of the game ball previously blocks the specific area hole which gives the third and fourth benefits, so that The game ball can be guided to the specific area hole that gives the maximum benefit.

Further, for example, when two game balls successively flow into the timed branch region 6410, the previous game ball flows into a specific region hole that gives the third highest profit (two below the maximum profit). In the case of a short delay, a slide delay device that causes the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area hole that gives the second highest profit (one less than the maximum profit) to flow toward the more profitable specific area hole side. May be provided. In this case, two game balls flow into the timed branch region 6410, and the previous game ball flows into the specific region hole that gives the third highest profit. In the case where the later game ball flows down through the specific area hole that gives the second highest profit within a short time after flowing into, the slide delay device acts on the latter game ball to move the latter game ball. It can be made to flow down to the hole side of the specific area where the profit is the highest.

The slide delay device extends, for example, for a short time when a game ball flows into a specific area hole that gives the fourth highest profit, and gives the second highest profit (one below the maximum profit). It is also possible to adopt a mode in which the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area hole or the specific area hole that gives the third highest profit (two below the maximum profit) flows down to the specific area hole side with higher profit. In this case, if the previous game ball flows into the specific area hole that gives the fourth highest profit, and then the later game ball reaches the entrance opening of the specific area hole within a short time, the slide delay occurs. By the action of the device, the subsequent game ball can be made to flow down to the specific region side with a higher profit.

In addition, when three game balls flow into the timed branch region 6410, the profit obtained by entering the first game ball into the specific region hole having the third highest profit and operating the rotating member, the profit obtained is obtained. Since the lowest specific area hole is closed, either one of the remaining two game balls will pass through the specific area hole that maximizes the profit to be obtained.

Therefore, for example, when three game balls continuously flow into the timed branch region 6410, the previous game ball is guided to a specific region hole that gives the third highest profit (two below the maximum profit). By disposing the guide device on the upstream side of the specific area hole, it is possible to guide either one of the subsequent game balls to the specific area hole which gives the maximum profit.

The same applies to the case where there are two game balls flowing into the timed branch region 6410. This is also true when the number of specific area holes is 5 or more. That is, when the specific area hole 6440 is composed of n (n is a natural number) holes that give different profits, and m (m is a natural number, m<n) game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410, If the first game ball flows down to the specific area hole that gives the mth highest profit from the top, the subsequent game balls will be prevented from flowing into the specific area hole that gives a lower profit, so the rest Any of these game balls will flow down the specific area hole with the highest profit. Therefore, the player can obtain the maximum profit (16 round jackpot).

Therefore, the number (m) of game balls flowing into the timed branch region 6410 and the order of profit (n1) of the specific region hole in which the first game ball is accommodated are detected, and they are determined to have a predetermined relationship (m≧). If n1) is satisfied, one of the later game balls will pass through the specific area hole to which the maximum profit is given, so when the relationship is satisfied, perform the production of the maximum profit. Is also good. This allows the player to watch the game ball flowing down the timed branch area 6410 with a sense of security.

Although the case where the screw member 7453 is constantly driven has been described in the seventh embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a driving mode may be used in which every several seconds (for example, 10 seconds) of driving is stopped for several seconds (for example, 1 second). In this case, the attitude of the screw member 7453 can be determined and the timing hitting to shoot the game ball can be suppressed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the jackpot expected value until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<The point where both balls go to an advantageous route by putting two balls into the sorting means>
Movable ball entering means forming an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening, and the game ball entering the winning opening of the movable entering means passes through a specific area provided in the movable entering means. In a gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting after discharging or discharging without passing through the specific area, a game in which the movable ball entering means enters a ball at an interval shorter than a predetermined interval. A gaming machine A1 provided with a compound ball guiding means configured to easily guide all the balls to a specific area.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the operation trigger occurs, the movable ball-entering device changes to the open state for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball that has entered the movable ball-entering device in the open state passes through a specific area. There is a game machine that can be a big hit by doing (see, for example, JP-A-2014-61177). In this gaming machine, the predetermined opening time is set to be short (approximately 0.5 seconds), so in most cases when the game ball is thrown into the movable ball-entering device during the game, it is stored in the movable ball-entering device. Although the number of game balls to be used is one, rarely, two game balls may be accommodated in the movable ball entrance device. Due to the low frequency of occurrence, the player's expectation is greatly improved when two game balls are accommodated in the movable ball entrance device. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the route that the game ball can pass when one game ball flows down to the movable ball entrance device, and the game ball passes when two game balls flow down to the movable ball entrance device. Since the route to be obtained is the same, even if two game balls gather and flow down to the movable ball entrance device, two game balls flow down to the movable ball entrance device separately at two times at different timings. In comparison, the probability that the game ball will pass through the specific area was not improved. In this case, compared to the degree of improvement in the player's expectation, there is a problem that the actual game result is not accompanied and the player is discouraged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the game ball A is provided with the compound ball guiding means configured to easily guide all the game balls entering the movable ball means at intervals shorter than the predetermined interval to the specific area, The probability that a game ball will pass through a specific area when a plurality of game balls flow down to the ball entrance means can be significantly improved as compared with the case where one game ball is housed in the movable ball entrance means. .. As a result, the degree of improvement in the player's expectation can be balanced with the actual game result, and the player's interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the compound ball guiding means is configured so that the moving means that performs an operation that affects the progress of the game ball by contacting the game ball and the game ball that contacts the moving means can flow down. A plurality of distribution channels are provided, and the plurality of distribution channels are advantageous side channels that guide the game balls to the specific area, and compared with the advantageous side channels, the game balls are provided in the specific area. And a disadvantageous side channel with a low probability of passing, wherein the advantageous side channel is configured as a channel through which a game ball is delivered when the movable means is in a ball delivery state that can be configured by operation. The game ball A2 is characterized in that when the one game ball is in contact with the movable means, the other game ball is in contact with the movable means while the game ball is in the sending state.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, when a plurality of game balls simultaneously come into contact with the movable means of the compound ball guiding means, the movable means constitutes a ball-sending state by the operation, The game ball can be sent to the advantageous side flow path. Therefore, it is not necessary to dispose the driving means for sorting the case where the game ball passes through the advantageous side passage and the case where the gaming ball passes through the disadvantageous side passage, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A2, the operation mode of the movable means is composed of a reciprocating operation, and one game ball comes into contact with the movable means from one direction of the operation direction of the reciprocating operation, and another game ball reciprocates. The game machine A3, wherein the movable means constitutes the ball-sending state by contacting the movable means from another direction of the operation direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the game ball applies a load to the movable means from both directions of the reciprocating movement direction of the movable means, and the movable means forms a ball-sending state by balancing the loads. , It is possible to prevent an erroneous operation in which the movable means is in a ball-sending state when only one game ball is in contact with the movable means.

The mode of reciprocal movement of the movable means is not limited. For example, it may be a rotating operation or a sliding operation.

In the gaming machine A3, the movable means constitutes the ball sending state in an initial state where the game balls are not in contact with each other and the forces are balanced, and in the initial state, the game balls are movable from one direction of the reciprocating motion. After contacting the means, until the game ball separates from the movable means, a first state and a second state having a movement resistance different from that of the first state are sequentially configured, and the second state of the second state The moving resistance is made larger than that in the first state, and in the second state, the movable means constitutes the ball-sending state by the movable means contacting the movable means. ..

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, when the game ball can start contacting with the movable means while enabling the ball-sending state as an initial state in which the forces applied to the movable means are balanced. Since the first state is lower resistance than the second state, when one gaming ball abuts the movable means in the initial state, the movable means is moved immediately, so that the gaming ball is erroneously advantageous side flow path. It is possible to prevent the ball from being sent to, and after that, the movable means changes to the second state in which the resistance is higher than the first state, thereby gaining a period until the second game ball comes into contact with the movable means. You can Thereby, even when the two game balls reach the movable means with a gap, it is possible to easily form a state in which the second game ball contacts the movable means in the second state of the movable means, Since the movable means constitutes a ball sending state by the second game ball contacting the movable means, the game ball can be sent to the advantageous side flow path.

The gaming machine A3 or A4 is provided with a bridging means that operates as the movable means operates, and the bridging means is such that one gaming ball hits the movable means from one direction of the reciprocating operation direction. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that another gaming ball, which comes into contact with the movable means after coming into contact, is made to flow down to a position in which it comes into contact with the movable means from another direction.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the bridging means causes another gaming ball to come into contact with the movable means after one gaming ball comes into contact with the movable means from one direction, Since it flows down to the position where it abuts the movable means from the other direction, even if one game ball and another game ball flow down from the same direction toward the movable means, one game ball and another game Instead of moving the balls to one side, it is possible to move the balls one by one in both directions in the reciprocating movement direction of the movable means.

In the gaming machine A1, the compound ball guiding means is configured so that the moving means that performs an operation that affects the progress of the game ball by contacting the game ball and the game ball that contacts the moving means can flow down. A plurality of distribution channels, the movable means, when the previous game sphere and the latter game sphere contact the movable means, after the contacting destination game sphere flows into the distribution channel The gaming machine A6, characterized in that the movable means constitutes the ball-sending state by the subsequent game ball coming into contact with the movable means within a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A1, the movable means is moved by contacting the later gaming ball with the movable means within a predetermined period after the previous gaming ball flows into the distribution channel. Since the ball-sending state is configured, it is not limited to the case where a plurality of balls come into contact with the movable means together, and the movable means can be in a ball-sending state, and in that case, only the game ball afterwards flows into the advantageous side flow path. be able to.

As a result, for example, when the movable ball entering means is opened twice when the operation triggers once, one game ball is inserted into the movable ball entering means each time it is opened, resulting in the movable ball entering. When two game balls are accommodated in the means (when the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the movable means becomes long) and when the movable ball entering means is once opened, the movable ball entering means has two game balls. The number of game balls flowing into the advantageous side flow path can be changed depending on the case where two game balls are accommodated in the movable ball entering means by entering the individual balls, and the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted. Can be planned.

In the gaming machine A1, the compound ball guiding means includes a driving means having an operating portion for performing a driving force to the gaming ball and ejecting the driving ball, a stopping means for holding the gaming ball on the front side in the operating direction of the operating portion, and a driving means. And a plurality of distribution channels configured so that the game balls emitted by the driving force given from the means can flow down, and these plurality of distribution channels are advantageous side flows that guide the game balls to the specific region. A path and a disadvantageous side passage having a low probability of passing the game ball to the specific region as compared with the advantageous side passage, and the advantageous side passage holds a plurality of game balls in the retaining means. Is configured as a flow path through which the game ball is sent, and the disadvantageous flow path is configured as a flow path through which the game ball is sent when one game ball is retained in the retaining means. Characteristic game machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, it is applied to the operating part by whether one gaming ball or a plurality of gaming balls retained in the retaining means is ejected by the operation of the operating portion of the driving means. By utilizing the fact that the resistances are different, it is possible to change whether the game ball flows down the advantageous side flow path or the disadvantageous side flow path while performing the same operation in the operation part of the drive means.

The mode of the driving means is not limited to a specific mode. For example, it may be formed of a solenoid member that electromagnetically operates when energized, or may be formed of a spring member that applies a driving force by a returning operation after elastically deforming.

In the gaming machine A7, the operation of the operating unit by the driving means is performed after waiting for the gaming ball entering the movable entering means to reach the stopping means.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, the operation of the operating unit of the driving means is performed after waiting for the gaming ball entering the movable ball entering means to reach the stopping means. In a state where two game balls have entered the movable ball entering means, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball ejected by the driving force of the driving means and the game ball on the way to the stopping means collide with each other.

With this, when the number of game balls entered into the movable ball entering means is two, the mode in which these two game balls are ejected by the driving means is taken as an operation part of the driving means for both the two playing balls. It is possible to limit to one mode in which ejection is performed in a state of being arranged on the front side.

Therefore, the operation mode of the game ball when two game balls enter the movable ball means can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine A1, the compound ball guiding means includes a plurality of distribution channels configured to allow the game balls to flow down, and the plurality of distribution channels guide the game balls to the specific area. And a disadvantageous side passage having a low probability of passing the game ball to the specific region as compared with the advantageous side passage, and a plurality of game balls accommodated in the movable ball entering means collide with each other. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to easily pass through the advantageous side flow path.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, whether or not the gaming ball easily passes through the advantageous side channel changes depending on whether or not the gaming ball collides in the distribution channel, so that it is movable. Even after the game ball enters the ball entering means, the player's attention can be continuously collected on the game ball. In addition, by utilizing the fact that the flow-down mode changes due to collisions between the game balls, the probability that the game balls pass through the advantageous side flow path is only changed, and it operates by contact with the game balls. Since a movable body that operates is unnecessary, product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A9, the compound ball guiding means is provided with a guiding area for guiding the game ball to each flow path of the plurality of distribution flow paths, and the guiding area is formed in a shape in which a bottom plate is tapered downward, A game ball is guided to the distribution flow path through an opening provided in the bottom plate, and an advantageous side opening for guiding the game ball to the advantageous side flow path is provided for playing the game ball to the disadvantage side flow path. A gaming machine A10, which is arranged at a lower position than a disadvantageous side opening to be guided.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the advantageous side opening that guides the game ball from the guiding region to the advantageous side flow path is at a lower position than the disadvantageous side opening that guides the disadvantageous flow path. Since it is arranged at, it is possible to easily introduce the game ball whose speed has decreased due to the collision into the advantageous side flow path.

<If two are entered in V, at least one is selected as the better lottery. >
When an actuation trigger occurs during the game, a movable ball entering means that changes from a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the winning opening for a predetermined opening time to an open state in which the game ball can enter the winning opening. , A plurality of arranged in the movable ball entering means, and a fixed area for confirming that the game ball that has entered the winning opening of the movable ball entering means is guided to a specific area provided in the movable ball entering means A comparison is made between a first specific area for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the game ball within the specific area, and a benefit given to the player for passing the game ball through the first specific area. In a gaming machine including a second specific area in which a profit to be given to a player is small when the game ball passes through, in the case where a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the first A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising first means for making it easier to obtain a profit due to a game ball passing through a specific region as compared with a profit due to a game ball passing through the second specific region.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the operation trigger occurs, the movable ball-entering device changes to the open state for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball that has entered the movable ball-entering device in the open state passes through a specific area. There is a gaming machine that allows the player to make a profit by doing so (for example, see JP-A-2014-61177). In this gaming machine, the predetermined opening time is set to be short (approximately 0.5 seconds), so in most cases that the game ball enters the movable ball entrance device during the game, the ball enters the movable ball entrance device. Although the number of game balls is one, rarely, two game balls may enter the movable ball entrance device. Due to its low frequency of occurrence, when two game balls enter the movable ball entrance device, the player's expectation is greatly improved. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when two game balls enter the movable ball-entering device and both of these two game balls pass through the fixed area, one of the game balls is in the second specific area. After passing, even if another game ball passes through the first specific area after that, the player cannot obtain the benefit of the game ball passing through the first specific area. In this case, compared to the degree of improvement in the player's expectation, there is a problem that the actual game result is not accompanied and the player is discouraged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first means, when a plurality of game balls pass through the finalized region within a predetermined period, the benefit of the game ball passing through the first specific region is 2 As compared to the benefit of a game ball passing through a specific area, it is easier for the player to obtain. Therefore, the degree of improvement in the player's expectation when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, It is possible to balance with the actual game result. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1, the first means includes a first passage passage connecting the fixed area and the first specific area to allow a game ball to pass therethrough, and the fixed area and the second specific area. A second passage flow path connecting between the game spheres is provided, and the period during which the game sphere passes through the second passage is compared with the period during which the game sphere passes through the first passage. A gaming machine B2 characterized by being configured to be long.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the period during which the gaming ball passes through the first passage is shortened as compared with the period during which the gaming ball passes through the second passage. When a plurality of game balls pass through the defined area at approximately the same time and the plurality of game balls are scattered in the first passage and the second passage, the game balls pass through the first specific passage with priority. It is possible to give the player a profit by doing.

It should be noted that the method of making the period during which the game ball passes through the first passage channel different from the period during which the game ball passes through the second passage channel is not particularly limited. For example, the length of the second passage is set to the first passage so that the flow speed of the game balls is the same when passing through the first passage and when flowing down the second passage. It may be longer in comparison, or the first passage channel and the second passage channel may have the same length, and the speed at which the game ball flows down the first passage channel causes the game ball to pass through the second passage channel. It may be set to be larger than the flow-down speed (for example, the descending inclination angle of the first passage channel may be larger than the descending inclination angle of the second passage passage). The game ball may be stopped within the second passage for a predetermined period by providing a passage preventing unit that prevents the game ball from passing by projecting inward for a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine B2, the first passage channel and the second passage channel are constituted by the same channel in a predetermined section from the fixed region, and the first passage channel or the second passage channel. The flow path is branched by bending at least one of the predetermined branch areas, the branch area is configured in a mode of decelerating the reached game balls, and the first means is a plurality of game balls collected in the branch areas. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that it comprises a contact inflow means for allowing at least one game ball to flow into the first passage flow path by reaching it.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, when a plurality of gaming balls pass through the defined area, the preceding gaming ball is decelerated in the branching area, and the succeeding gaming ball and the preceding gaming ball. And can be made to reach the branch area collectively, and in that case, the contact inflow means allows at least one game ball to flow into the first passage flow path, so that the benefit of the game ball passing through the first specific area Can be easily obtained by the player.

The form of the contact inflow means is not particularly limited. For example, it may be configured as a wall portion capable of blocking the progress of the game ball, or may be configured as an operation unit that operates in response to the game ball reaching the branch area, or may be configured to be constant after the power is turned on. It may be configured as an electric unit that electrically operates in an operation mode.

In the gaming machine B3, the specific area is provided with an advantageous specific area that gives a greater benefit to the player than the first specific area, and the first means transfers the second passage to the first passage. And a bridge flow passage that enables the passage of a game ball that is connected to the advantageous specific area and that passes through the first passage passage and is connected to the advantageous specific area. Advantageous passage flow path is provided, and the game ball that has passed through the bridge passage and the game ball that passes through the first passage flow passage merge to facilitate the flow of the game ball into the advantageous passage flow path. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being configured in an aspect.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the gaming ball flowing from the second passage to the bridging passage merges with the gaming ball flowing down the first passage to provide a gaming ball. Since it becomes easy to flow into the advantageous passage passage connected to the advantageous specific area, after the plurality of game balls have passed through the fixed area, the game balls face the first passage passage and the second passage passage, respectively. In the case of, it is possible to leave the possibility that the game ball flowing down the second passage may assist the game ball passing through the first passage toward the advantageous passage, The presence of the inflowing game balls can be increased.

The method for facilitating the flow of the game ball flowing down the first passage channel into the advantageous side channel is not particularly limited. For example, the game balls may be brought into contact with each other by changing the direction of flow of the game balls, or a plurality of game balls may reach (retain) at the entrance of the advantageous passage passage to the advantageous passage passage. It may be performed by providing an introducing means for facilitating the introduction of the sphere.

In the gaming machine B4, the first means includes a flow-down mode changing means that affects a flow-down mode of the game ball passing by the operating state, and the flow-down mode changing means has an effect on the flow-down mode of the passing game ball. It is configured in a mode in which the state changes every predetermined period between a passing state that is made smaller and a resistance state that has a greater effect on the flow-down mode of the game ball that passes than that passing state, and the game ball is said flow-down mode A gaming machine B5, characterized in that, depending on a state of the flow-down mode changing means when passing through the changing means, whether or not a game ball easily flows into the advantageous passage flow path is changed.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the flow-down state changing means changes its state between the passing state and the resistance state at every predetermined period, and depending on which timing the flow-down state changing means passes. , The game sphere changes depending on whether or not it easily flows into the advantageous passage, so in the state where the game sphere flows down the first passage, another game sphere flows from the bridge passage to the first passage. It is possible to generate a plurality of patterns to be played, which allows the player to play a fresh game each time.

In the gaming machines B3 to B5, the contact inflow means is configured to be capable of changing its state between a normal state and a special state different from the normal state, and in the normal state, a plurality of game balls that have reached the branch area. Among them, one game ball is caused to flow into the first passage, and in the special state, all of the plurality of game balls having reached the branch region are caused to flow into the first passage. Gaming machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B3 to B5, the profit obtained by the player can be changed depending on the state of the contact inflow means, and the attention power of the contact inflow means can be improved. it can.

In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the first means is in an overhang state in which at least the game ball that overhangs inward of the second passage channel and flows down the second passage channel is stopped, and the second state. Equipped with a passage prevention means that constitutes an immersive state that sinks to the outside of the passage, the bulging state is maintained at least at the time when the game ball flowing down the movable entrance ball means reaches the passage prevention means. A gaming machine B7 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 to B6, the passage prevention means maintains the extended state at least at the time when the game ball reaches the passage prevention means, and stops the game ball. It is possible to lengthen the period until the game ball passing through the two-passage passage reaches the second specific region by the period during which the passage preventing means maintains the overhang state.

As an operation mode of the passage prevention means, for example, a predetermined period (a period sufficiently longer than the period required for the game ball to reach the passage prevention means after the actuation trigger for opening the movable ball entering means occurs) ) An operation mode in which the passage preventing means is maintained in the extended state and then the state is changed to the immersed state is illustrated.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the game ball is provided with a blocking member movably arranged in the inflow portion of the second specific area so as to form a state where the game ball cannot flow in, and the game ball is the inflow of the second specific area. It is configured to move a position where it can flow down to a part, and the blocking member prevents at least one of the plurality of game balls from flowing down to the second specific region. Amusement machine B8.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the gaming ball is arranged at a position where it can flow down to the second specific region, the blocking member prevents the flow down, It is possible to eliminate the premise that it is decided that the game ball will flow into the second specific region because the game ball is in a fixed arrangement, and the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

In the gaming machine B8, the blocking member constitutes a first state in which a load is exerted on the game ball to influence the flow-down mode and a second state in which the flow-down mode of the game ball is not affected. It is possible, depending on whether it is in the first state or the second state, a game ball flows down to the first specific region, or the profit given to the player is larger than that in the first specific region. A gaming machine B9 characterized in that the probability of whether or not the game ball flows down to the advantageous specific area changes.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, after the gaming ball has passed through the blocking member, the flowing down mode of the gaming ball can be made different between the first state and the second state. Differences can be tied to the benefits that players can expect. Therefore, the attention of the game ball can be improved even after passing through the blocking member.

<After entering 2 balls in V, the round distribution of later game balls will be more than the previous game balls>
A first specific area that allows the game ball to pass and gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the game ball, and a first specific area that allows the player to pass the game ball and passes the game ball to the player. A composite specific area having a plurality of specific areas including a second specific area that gives a profit less than the profit obtained by passing, and a finalized area that is determined to guide the game ball to the composite specific area. In the gaming machine, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the profit given to the player by the subsequent game ball passing through the composite specific area is A gaming machine C1 provided with a second means which is equal to or more than a profit given to a player when it passes through the composite specific area alone.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the operation trigger occurs, the movable ball-entering device changes to the open state for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball that has entered the movable ball-entering device in the open state passes through a specific area. There is a gaming machine that allows the player to make a profit by doing so (for example, see JP-A-2014-61177). In this gaming machine, the predetermined opening time is set to be short (approximately 0.5 seconds), so in most cases that the game ball enters the movable ball entrance device during the game, the ball enters the movable ball entrance device. Although the number of game balls is one, rarely, two game balls may enter the movable ball entrance device. Due to its low frequency of occurrence, when two game balls enter the movable ball entrance device, the player's expectation is greatly improved. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when two game balls enter the movable ball-entering device and both of these two game balls pass through the fixed area, each game ball passes through a specific area. Whether or not to do so is left to the randomness, and there has been a problem that it cannot be said that the interest of the player can be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the profit given to the player by the subsequent game ball passing through one specific area is obtained. , The second ball is provided with the second means that is equal to or more than the profit given to the player by the game ball that has passed the other specific region first, so that when the player sees the game ball passing the specific region, the previous ball passes. It promises more profits than the profits obtained from a particular area. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's interest until the succeeding ball passes, and the interest of the player can be improved.

It should be noted that the mode of profit given to the player by the subsequent game balls passing through the composite specific area is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the profit may be given to the player when the subsequent game ball passes through the specific region, or the specific region where the previous game ball passes as a result of the subsequent game ball passing through the specific region is The profit may be given to the player when the game ball is changed (increased) from the second specific region to the first specific region and the previous game ball passes through the first specific region (after the change).

In the gaming machine C1, the second means includes movable means that is operated by a game ball, and the operation of the movable means causes the game ball that operates the movable means to pass through the specific area. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that passage of a game ball to another specific area which gives a profit of less than is impossible.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the limitation of the specific area through which the gaming ball passes is performed by the movable means operated by the gaming ball, so that the shape of the downflow path through which the gaming ball flows down is special. It is possible to limit the specific area through which the game ball passes without being limited.

Note that the mode in which the game ball cannot pass through the specific area is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the flow path through which the game balls flow down toward the specific area may be blocked, or the opening through which the game balls are guided to the specific area may be closed.

Further, the mode of operating with the game ball is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a means that is operated by an actuator that operates when the game ball passes through the detection sensor, or may be a device that is pushed by the game ball when the game ball contacts and operates.

In the gaming machine C2, the movable means operates after the specific area through which the previous game ball passes is determined, and the gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, after the state in which the specific area through which the gaming ball passes can be changed (after the specific area through which the gaming ball passes is confirmed, that is, Since the movable means operates after the state where there is a possibility of bouncing from the opening), it is possible to prevent unintentionally limiting the specific area through which the game ball passes, and the profit obtained for the player is disturbed. It can be prevented.

For example, if the movable means is operated before the specific area to be passed is determined, the game ball itself bounces from the specific area after the operation of the movable means, and the profit of the movable means is obtained to make the specific area with a larger profit. The situation of passing through occurs. In this case, the profit of the movable means can be obtained even when there is only one game ball, and the profit given to the player may be too large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the movable means is operated after the specific area through which the gaming ball passes is determined, so that two gaming balls have reached the specific area. It is possible to secure the playability in which the movable means exerts an effect under the condition.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the movable means operates in such a manner that the game balls cannot pass through the entrance openings that are the entrances to the specific areas and are respectively arranged in the vicinity of the specific areas. Characteristic gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the movable means is arranged in the vicinity of each specific area and operates in a mode that narrows the entrance opening that is the entrance to each specific area. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the movable means before the later game ball enters the specific area.

As a result, even if the distance between the first game ball and the second game ball is narrow, it is possible to easily operate the movable means before the later game ball enters the specific region, so that from the fixed region to the specific region. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the flow path along which the game ball flows.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the movable means is configured such that, in a state after the operation, the game ball is allowed to flow down along one surface, and the game ball is transmitted along one surface of the movable means to identify the other game ball. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being configured to be directed to an area.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, in the state after the operation of the movable means, the game ball is configured to travel along one surface of the movable means toward the other entrance opening. In addition to the role of preventing the passage of the game ball to the specific area, it is possible to have a role of preventing the retention of the game ball later.

The manner in which the game ball is directed to the entrance opening is not particularly limited, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a plate is projected from one surface of the flow-down path, and the surface of the plate facing the game ball is configured to be inclined with respect to the extending direction of the flow-down path, thereby guiding the game ball in a predetermined direction. The movable member may be operated in such a manner as to close the hole with respect to the inlet opening which is an opening to the specific region and is directed upward and downward, and the movable member is movable by forming the upper surface of the movable member to be inclined. The game ball on the upper surface of the member may be configured to flow along the slope.

In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the movable means narrows the entrance of the specific area where the game ball is determined to pass by operation so that the game ball cannot pass.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the movable means is configured in such a manner that only one gaming ball before passing through the specific area can pass therethrough, so the predetermined period When two balls pass through the fixed area, the respective game balls can be passed through different specific areas, and the second means can be made easier to operate.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, each entrance opening that is an entrance to each of the specific areas and is arranged in the vicinity of each of the specific areas, and a step in which the previous game ball starts to enter the first opening of the opening. The game machine C7 is provided with: a delay movable means for extending the period required for the later game ball to enter the other entrance opening in the state after the operation.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the delay movable means is operated at a stage in which the previous game ball starts to enter the entrance opening of 1, and the later stage in the state after the operation. Since the period required for the game ball to enter the other entrance opening is extended, it is possible to prevent the later game ball from passing through the entrance opening early by the operation of the delay moving means.

As a result, when the previous game ball and the latter game ball reach each entrance opening at a short interval, even if the latter game ball is likely to pass through a specific area with a small profit, it enters another entrance opening. It is possible to extend the period for which the moving means is used to make it easy to change (increased profit) the specific area through which the subsequent game balls pass.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, and C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2, characterized in that in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
2. Description of the Related Art In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a game area is provided with a winning opening and a gaming ball can be won in the winning opening (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-61177).
However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the flow down of the game ball after flowing down to the winning opening.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which a gaming ball that has flowed down to a winning opening flows down favorably.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is capable of passing the game ball, and the first specific region for giving a predetermined profit to the player by the passage of the game ball, and the game ball being passable. And a composite specific area having a plurality of specific areas including a second specific area that provides a player with a profit less than the profit obtained by passing the first specific area by passing a game ball. In a gaming machine comprising a confirmed area for confirming that a game ball is to be guided to, when a plurality of gaming balls pass through the confirmed area within a predetermined period, a later gaming ball causes the composite specific area to There is provided a second means in which the profit given to the player by passing the game is equal to or more than the profit given to the player when the previous game ball alone passes through the composite specific area.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the second means is provided with a movable means that is operated by a game ball, and the movable means is operated by the operation of the movable means. It is impossible to pass the game ball to another specific area that gives a profit less than the profit given by the ball passing through the specific area.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the movable means operates after the specific area through which the previous game ball passes is determined.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to improve the flow of the gaming ball that has entered the winning opening.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the flow of the game ball can be made favorable by the operation of the movable means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the flow of the ball can be further improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
190 Movable ball entry device (movable ball entry means)
190b Large prize hole switch (prize hole)
320, 3320, 4320 Route distribution unit (a part of distribution unit)
322b Plate portion (bridge means)
330 Sorting inclined part (part of sorting means)
322 Distributor (part of compound ball guiding means, movable means)
325 Special route taxiway (part of distribution channel, advantageous channel)
326, 3326 Normal route guidance (part of distribution flow path, disadvantageous flow path)
340 Definite area hole (part of definite area)
410, 5410 First branch area (branch area)
411 Contact wall (a part of the first means, contact inflow means)
421a Movable plate (downflow mode changing means)
431 Sorting protrusion (part of the first means)
441 First specific area hole (part of advantageous passage)
441a, 2441a First specific area switch (part of first specific area, part of advantageous specific area, part of first passage)
442a, 2442a Second specific area switch (part of first specific area, part of second specific area, part of first passage channel, part of second passage channel)
443a, 2443a Third specific area switch (part of second specific area, part of second passage)
2411 Time stop plate (part of passage prevention means)
2420 Electromagnetic solenoid (part of first means, part of passage prevention means)
3321 Guide rails (part of compound ball guiding means, part of guiding area)
3323 Special route hole (advantage side opening)
3324 Hole for normal route (opening on the disadvantage side)
4322 Retention channel (part of compound ball guiding means, stopping means)
4323 Injection solenoid (part of compound ball guiding means, driving means)
5411 Operation wall (part of first means, contact inflow means)
6440 Specific area hole (part of composite specific area)
6440i Entrance opening (entrance opening)
6450 Profit increase device (part of the second means)
6451 First rotation member (part of movable means)
6452 2nd rotation member (a part of movable means)
6460 Slide delay device (part of delay moving means)
7420 Rotational distribution device (part of first means, part of blocking member)
7422 Second annular member (part of blocking member)
7440 Specific area hole (part of specific area)
7441 First specific area hole (part of advantageous specific area)
7442 Second specific area hole (part of the first specific area)
7443 Third specific area hole (part of the second specific area)
7453 Screw member (a part of contact inflow means)
R1 first branch guiding channel (part of the first passing channel, part of the second passing channel)
R2 second branch guiding channel (a part of the first passing channel, a part of the second passing channel)
R3 Third branch flow channel (part of the first flow path, part of the second flow path)
R4 Special guidance channel (part of first passage, part of second passage, bridge passage)
R5 First delayed induction channel (part of first passage, second passage)
R6 Second delayed induction flow path (part of the second passage flow path)
RS1 circular arc side surface (one side through which game balls are transmitted)
RS2 arc side surface (one side where the game ball is transmitted)

Claims (2)

A first specific area the player obtained a predetermined award by the passage of the game ball game ball is a passable by passage of the game ball is a passable game ball player is smaller than the predetermined profit In a gaming machine provided with a predetermined specific area having a plurality of specific areas including a second specific area that can obtain a profit, and a guide area configured to guide a game ball to the predetermined specific area,
A movable means operable by a load from a game ball passing through the second specific area,
By a predetermined operation of the movable means, a state in which a game ball easily passes through the first specific region is formed,
When a plurality of game balls pass through the guide area within a predetermined period, a second game of the plurality of game balls that passes through the guide area after the first game ball that passes through the guide area It benefits the player obtained by the ball passes through the first specific area, the benefit is greater than the player obtained when a game ball passes the second specific area alone within the predetermined time period Characteristic game machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.

Images